JP6607512B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and is particularly applicable to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  A conventional gaming machine has a first start port, a second start port, a first grand prize port, and a second grand prize port. When a game ball enters the first start port, the first symbol is variably displayed. 2. When a game ball entered the start opening, there was a display that variably displayed the second symbol. Then, when the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, either the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening is opened, or the first big prize opening and the second big prize are opened. There has been a gaming machine that executes a jackpot game in which a winning opening is opened in a predetermined order (Patent Document 1).

  Moreover, in patent document 1, it has a some game state as a game state, and it becomes a game machine which transfers to a probability change state and time-short state advantageous to a player from a normal state with execution of a big hit game as an opportunity. Yes. Further, in the advantageous state, if the next big hit game does not occur while the symbols are displayed in a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is terminated and the normal state is restored. Such gaming machines have exhibited certain effects such as preventing the game from getting bored by the transition of the gaming state.

JP 2017-055811 A

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 and the conventional gaming machine, the transition state of the gaming state and the gaming state after the transition are uniform, and the gaming interest has not been enhanced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that diversifies gaming characteristics and enhances the gaming interest by giving a characteristic to the transition state of the gaming state.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first start opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first gaming state in which a game ball enters the second starting port at a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which a gaming ball enters the second starting port at a higher frequency than the first gaming state. , A game state setting means capable of setting,
A special game that executes a jackpot game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter when the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a big hit. Execution means ;
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a big hit ;
A first condition state in which the time for the variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a first condition; a second condition state in which the time for the variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a second condition; A second identification information variation time determination means capable of setting
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in parallel,
The second condition state is shorter than the first condition state, and the average time of the variable display time of the second identification information determined is shorter.
As the gaming state, the predetermined probability and the first gaming state and the first condition state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability, the first gaming state and the first state Two condition states, the high probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state,
The jackpot has at least a first specific result and a second specific result,
When the first specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state. In the gaming state, the first identification information and the first 2 When the number of times of variable display with the identification information becomes a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability, the first gaming state, and the second condition state,
When the second specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state. In the gaming state, the first identification information and the first 2 When the number of times of variable display with the identification information becomes the specific number, the gaming state changes to the predetermined probability, the first gaming state, and the first condition state,
When the gaming state after the special game is set to the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state as the first specific result, and the special game as the second specific result When the game state after the end is set to the predetermined probability, the second game state, and the second condition state, a common effect is executed, so that the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state. In addition, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the state is the second condition state, the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the gameplay and improve the gaming interest.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display device shown in FIG. 3, and is a view showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine. It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility etc. with the classification of winning and the opening pattern of a big prize opening. It is a table | surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a reach determination table, (D) is a normal symbol per determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table | surface which shows a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of an interruption process. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting entrance. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of the process during normal symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 success / failure determination processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 changing process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 confirmation process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 standby process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of special figure 2 determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 changing process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 confirmation process. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a change production start process. It is a table | surface which shows the design kind of effect design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect design game effect of the state A. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect design game effect of the state B. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of effect mode C, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of effect mode D. FIG. 52 shows the flow of effect symbol game effects in effect mode C. FIG. 49 shows the flow of effect symbol game effects in effect mode D. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the small hit change in effect mode D, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the small hit game in effect mode D. It is a flowchart of a small hit prefetch effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect when a specific period is started. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode selection screen during an ending period. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen from after the start of the mode selection period in jackpot game to after the start. (A) is a table | surface which shows the kind of 2nd effect pattern (battle effect pattern of effect mode C), (b) is a table | surface which shows the type of 3rd effect pattern (battle effect pattern of effect mode D). FIG. 38 shows a display example of a preview image in effect mode D. It is a display pattern determination table of a notice image.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following, a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing a winning game that can give a predetermined amount of gaming profit (for example, a prize ball) to a player when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in accordance with the end of the variable display of the symbol. An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 attached in the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is configured to be detachable from the machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 to which the gaming board 2 and the like are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island facility of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island facility, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side (left side in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

  In addition, the front frame 51 can supply a launching handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player and a game ball stored and stored to the launching device side. A ball hitting tray (upper pan) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower pan) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting tray 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. And simply referred to as “effect button 63”). The plurality of effect buttons can be used properly according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the first embodiment, and any input detection means (for example, the player directly touches the button portion to input) can be used as long as the input from the player can be detected. Or non-contact type input detection means (such as a photoelectric type) that detects and inputs that a part of the player's body is close Good.

  The front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and image display devices (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72). Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are located in front of the front frame 51 (player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed in a slanted shape in the outward direction so as to protrude toward the outside. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are similar to the image display device 7 described later, depending on the execution / non-execution of the game, the game situation, the game effect to be executed, etc. Game production (characters, production designs, etc.), demonstration production, information related to the game (acquired game information, number of rounds, number of consecutive games, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game production), Information related to the setting of the gaming machine (volume setting information, luminance setting information, etc.) is displayed. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information and may display the same information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. There is a case to do. Further, the same information is displayed on any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72, and the remaining one is different information. May be displayed. It should be noted that any one or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as “image display device”.

  The image display device 7 is provided in an inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in an outer region of the game area 3. ing. As shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). It has been. For this reason, the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 can be pivoted in the left-right direction. More specifically, it is configured to be able to turn a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) in the right direction from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because, when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, the second image display device 71 provided to protrude forward of the front frame 51 This is a configuration for preventing damage to the hall equipment (ball lending machine, inter-station equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side of FIG. 1) of the gaming machine 1. . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixedly provided to the front frame 51 and cannot rotate.

  In the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down is surrounded by the rail member 4. The game board 2 is provided with a decorative board surface lamp 5. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

  Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as “effect symbols”) are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, also referred to as an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as “effect symbol display section”). ), And the design symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R correspond to the gaming state according to the gaming state (low probability low base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later) set as the main player of the game. The effect symbol 8L is also referred to as “left symbol”, the effect symbol 8C is also referred to as “middle symbol”, and the effect symbol 8R is also referred to as “right symbol”.

  The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the gaming state is in a normal state (a low-probability low-base state described later, state A). As will be described in detail later, in this low probability low base state, the frequency of game balls entering the start port (second start port 21) is set lower than in the high base state, and whether or not a special symbol is appropriate The determination probability (first special symbol success / failure determination and second special symbol success / failure determination) is low (also referred to as “predetermined probability”), and the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. (2 times or more) is set (all deviations are 10 minutes). For this reason, in the normal state, the left game area 3A (the first game area 3A (the second game area) rather than the second special symbol is variably displayed by firing the game ball into the right game area 3B (the second game area) and entering the second start port 21. It is advantageous for a player to play a game in which a game ball is fired in one game area and entered into the first starting port 20 to display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In other words, in the normal state, it can be said that the game state is variably displayed mainly by the first special symbol (effect symbol). For this reason, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in synchronization with the first special symbol.

  Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, a first special symbol display 41a ("first") described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the “special symbol display unit”) and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as “second special symbol display unit”). The result of symbol change display (result of special symbol success / failure determination) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that any one (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”. Further, the special symbol success / failure determination is also simply referred to as “win / failure determination” or “first success / failure determination”. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that performs the special symbol success / failure determination is also referred to as “a / failure determination execution unit” or “first determination / failure determination execution unit”.

  For example, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit (first specific hit), the effect design is stopped and displayed with the same three-digit symbol (such as “77”) such as “777”. Say). In addition, when it is a small hit (second specific hit), it is produced with a preset chance symbol such as “135” or a small bonus exclusive symbol such as “3 * 3” (also referred to as “small hit symbol”). Stop displaying symbols. In addition, when a small hit is made, the symbols in the same mode may be stopped and displayed for the small hits symbol and the off symbol instead of the mode for displaying the small hits dedicated symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol, etc.) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped and the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

  Also, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is unacceptable, at least one of the three symbols such as “637” and “373” is stopped and displayed with a different symbol design (“out symbol” ”). Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (the result of the special symbol success / failure determination) by viewing the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed. That is, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol success / failure determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, Grasp the effect symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b. In addition, as a variation display mode of the effect symbol, for example, a mode in which scroll display is performed in the up and down, left and right, diagonal directions, a mode in which the effect display is performed using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b, and the first effect symbol display unit 7b. In addition, there is a mode of effect display using one or both of the second effect symbol display part 71a and the third effect symbol display part 72a. Moreover, in addition to this, you may have the aspect which produces an effect display only using the 2nd effect symbol display part 71a or the 3rd effect symbol display part 72a.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game effect (effect pattern game effect) using the effect symbols as described above, the game is executed in accordance with the winning game (big hit game, small hit game). A hit game effect (a big hit game effect, a small hit game effect), a demonstration for waiting for a customer, and the like are displayed. In the effect symbol game effect, the hit game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to effect symbols such as numbers, effect images other than effect symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed. Although details will be described later, a game state (state A, state B or state C), a state in which a game ball is fired in the left game area 3A, or a game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b differs depending on whether or not a game is being performed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously). Such a type of game The machine is also called “simultaneous variable machine”.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying a first effect hold 9a according to the number of first special figure hold to be described later. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display section) for displaying the second effect hold 9b in accordance with the number of second special figure hold to be described later. The first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, depending on the display mode (the number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area. And the stored number of second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b can be easily shown to the player. Note that the display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect to be executed (reach effect or the like). In addition, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the main special symbol) may be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decoration body 10 is provided in the vicinity of the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which a game ball can roll is provided below the center decorative body 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet. The warp flowing down the game area 3 is received from the warp inlet, and the game ball is discharged from the warp outlet and guided to the stage unit 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 can enter the first start port 20 described later with a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage unit 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, there is an electric decoration member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on according to the gaming state, and a decoration member 13 that is shaped like a character or a figure is arranged. Yes.

  In addition, a movable decorative member 14 that is operable in accordance with a game effect is provided at the upper part of the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. For example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined with the execution of a game effect having a relatively high possibility of winning). The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. As a result, the player enhances the gaming interest and increases the expectation of winning.

  Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease of entering a game ball is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the first special symbol is determined ( First special symbol success / failure determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination of success / failure after a predetermined time.

  Above the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, a gate 28 (a normal start opening, a passing opening, an entrance, a specific start, etc.) through which a game ball can pass (can enter) (Also called mouth). A game ball entering from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down in the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is the gate 28 and the start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28 a, a normal symbol success / failure random number or the like is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation condition) is established, The symbol symbol determination (also referred to as “second symbol determination”) is executed, the normal symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol symbol determination after a predetermined time. When the winning ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation), and the second starting port 21 is opened. In addition, a control unit (main control unit 80) that performs normal symbol determination as to whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation) to open the second start port 21 is referred to as “correction determination execution unit” or “ It is also referred to as “second success / failure determination execution means”. The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. In other words, the sensors that detect the entry into the gate are the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, when the gate 28 (start gate 29) is passed, the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the conditions for executing the big hit game are satisfied (the big hit execution) Only possible state or jackpot standby state). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (waiting state for big hit) is not satisfied, the control process for the normal symbol is performed, and the big hit start process is not executed. If the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the big hit waiting state), the waiting big hit game is started and a predetermined big prize opening ( A round game in which the first grand prize opening 30) is in an open state (a state in which a player can enter a ball) starts.

  The game area 3 is a right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 and a game area below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29) is provided with a first big prize opening 30. A big winning device 31 (also referred to as “first variable entrance”) is provided. The first grand prize winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32 and opens / closes the first grand prize winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on the top surface. When the opening / closing member 32 is closed, the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is closed and the game ball is placed on the top surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the left side to the right side in the drawing). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first grand prize opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first big prize opening 30. And then flow downward in the gaming area.

  Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 is retracted toward the back surface of the game board 3 to thereby form an upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Disappears. Thereby, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first grand prize opening 30 enters the first big prize opening 30. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game balls that have flowed down are smoothly drawn into the first large opening / closing member. While entering the winning opening 30, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be guided in an arbitrary direction (second starting port 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. Note that the first grand prize opening 30 can enter a game ball only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. In other words, the first grand prize winning device 31 (first variable entrance) is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 32 so that the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and the game ball can enter. It is possible to change to a ball ready state (open state).

  In the game area 3, the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center ornament 10, and the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30 does not change the ease of entering a game ball. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third start port 26 is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the third start port 26, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the second special symbol is determined ( When the second special symbol is determined), the second special symbol is started to be displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the predetermined special time has elapsed. The game ball passage is branched below (downstream) from the first grand prize winning opening 30 (upper and lower stages), the upper game ball passage where the third start opening 26 is provided, the second start opening 31 and the second start opening 31 A lower-stage game ball passage in which two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start port 26, for example. Alternatively, it flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. In addition, since the third starting opening 26 is a fixed winning device that can always enter the ball, the left hit game is a big hit (so-called first hit), and the first big hit game is executed by the right hit game. During the jackpot game, it is possible to place the game ball into the third start port 26 (hold) and execute the variation display of the second special symbol immediately after the jackpot game ends.

  In the game area 3, the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center decorative body 10, and the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, a variable in which the ease of entering a game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as “variable starter” or “variable starter”) having a second starter 21 of the type is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. If a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the second special symbol is determined (first 2 special symbol success / failure determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the success / failure determination after a predetermined time.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as “opening / closing member”), and opens and closes the second start port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second start port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows the game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and prevents the game ball from entering when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. Yes. The second starting port 21 is completely open when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the open state. It may not be impossible to enter the ball.

  Similarly to the opening / closing member 32, the movable member 23 is a gaming ball passage whose upper surface is substantially rectangular (long plate shape). In the closed state, the movable member 23 closes the inlet of the second starting port 21 and A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side in the drawing). Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the inlet portion of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21, It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  In addition, the movable member 23 is driven by a second start port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 is retracted in the back direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second start port 21. Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the inlet portion of the second start port 21 enters the second start port 21. Thus, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when opened) The ball smoothly enters the second starting port 21 and flows down in the closed state (when closed) to allow the game ball to flow in an arbitrary direction (a second large winning port 35 to be described later) by an inclined upper surface passage. To guide.

  Further, in the game area 3, which is the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center decorative body 10, the game area below (downstream) the second start port 21 is provided with a second big prize opening 35. A big winning device 36 (also referred to as “second variable entrance”) is provided. The second grand prize winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and opens / closes the second big prize winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on its upper surface. In the closed state, the opening / closing member 37 closes the entrance of the second grand prize winning opening 35 and opens / closes the opening / closing member 37. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side of the drawing). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second grand prize opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second big prize opening 35. And then flow downward in the gaming area.

  Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 is retracted in the back direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The open / close member 37 that has been removed disappears from the entrance of the second big prize opening 35. Thereby, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second grand prize opening 35 enters the second big prize opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens and closes the entrance of the second grand prize winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when opened). Is smoothly entered into the second grand prize winning opening 35, and in the closed state (when closed), the game ball that has flowed down is guided in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. Note that the second big winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second big prize winning device 36 (second variable entrance) is configured to open and close the open / close member 37 so that the game ball cannot enter and the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to change to a ball ready state (open state).

  Further, in the game area below the left area (left game area 3A) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, a plurality (three) of general entrances 27 are provided. In this way, the game area 3 in which various entrances are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into The hitting method in which the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is referred to as left strike, and the strike method in which the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B so as to flow down is referred to as right strike. . In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game is aimed at entering the first starting port 20 by left-handed. In other words, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly composed of a left-handed ball entering the first starting port 20 (first special symbol success / failure determination).

  On the other hand, if a win / loss determination (first special symbol success / failure determination) based on a ball entering the first starting port 20 is a big hit, after the big hit game and after the big hit game (special game) are finished (a low probability high base state or a high probability) In the low base state, the game is aimed at entering the gate 28, the first grand prize opening 30, the second start opening 21, or the second big prize opening 35 by right-handed. That is, the big hit game and the low-accuracy high base state (state B) or the high-probability low base state (state C) mainly enter the second starting port 21 (right special symbol determination). It becomes a right-handed game. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the first major winning port 30, the second major winning port 35, and the general winning port 27, the respective starting ports A predetermined number of game balls (also called “prize balls” or “game profit”) are paid out (given). In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out (the amount of game profit) based on the entrance to the first big prize opening 30 is the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the second big prize opening 35. Set more than the number (amount of gaming profit). Specifically, the first grand prize opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one entry, and the second big prize opening 35 has 10 pieces for one entry. The prize ball is to be paid out.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display 40 has a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) that displays the first special symbol in a variable manner and stops, and a second special symbol display that displays the second special symbol in a variable manner and stopped. 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display unit 42 (normal symbol display unit) that displays the normal symbol (also referred to as “specific identification information”) in a variable manner and stops display. In addition, the main indicator 40 includes a first special figure hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored decision determination information (first special figure hold) related to the first special symbol, and the determination information (second display) related to the second special symbol. 2nd special figure hold display 43b for displaying the number of stored 2 special figure hold), and a general figure hold display 44 for displaying the number of stored operation (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 is included. ing.

  The main display 40 also includes a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure determination is successful, the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure determination. When the result is a win, the round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, the gaming state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the shooting direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether it should be left-handed or left-handed. Various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main controller described later.

  The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the game ball entering the first start port 20. The change display of the second special symbol is performed based on the game ball entering the second start port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. In addition, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold display unit 43.

  In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then is stopped and displayed, and the first starting port 20 or the second starting port is displayed depending on the special symbol (stop symbol) that has been stopped (derived). The result of the success / failure determination (special symbol success / failure determination, jackpot lottery) based on the entry to 21 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols based on the special symbol success / failure determination. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the release pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol that is stopped is displayed. A special game (a big hit game, a small hit game) for opening the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 is performed. In addition, the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41 a is configured by eight LEDs indicated by “i to p”, and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is the first big hit (4R first big hit), the three LEDs “ijn” are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the second big hit (4R second big hit) is reached, the four LEDs “jnkl” are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, in the case of detachment, the two “lo” LEDs can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. The second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by “a to h”, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination. About the stop display mode, similarly to the first special symbol display device 41b, different display modes are set according to the result (big hit, small hit, miss) of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. In addition, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before derivation display), the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, in a predetermined order from left to right. It can be set as the aspect which each LED lights so that light may flow repeatedly.

  Here, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a hit (big hit or small hit) among the stop display modes (display result of the variable display) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is referred to as a “hit mode”. ”,“ Specific mode ”,“ specific display mode ”or“ specific display result ”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is out of place is“ out of mode ”or“ non-specific mode ” , Also referred to as “non-specific display mode” or “non-specific display result”. In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big win is also referred to as “big hit mode”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit is “small” It is also referred to as a “winning mode”. Furthermore, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the special symbol display unit 41. Also referred to as “variation display means” or “identification information display means”.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information (“acquired information”) such as a special symbol success / failure determination random number or the like based on the received ball. The acquired various types of information are temporarily stored in the special figure storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if it is information acquired based on the entrance to the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure storage unit 85a as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as "first acquisition information"), If it is the information acquired based on the entrance to the 2nd starting port 21, it will be memorize | stored in the 2nd special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part 85b as 2nd special figure reservation (it is also called "2nd acquisition information"). An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The first special figure storage unit 85a and the second special figure storage unit 85b are also referred to as “first acquisition information storage unit” and “second acquisition information storage unit”, respectively, and are also referred to as “acquisition information storage unit”. .

  The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when it is possible to display a special symbol based on the special figure hold. The digestion of the special symbol hold means that the special symbol determination random number or the like corresponding to the special symbol hold is determined, and the special symbol variable display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the special symbol variation display based on the game ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be executed immediately at the time of entering, During the execution of the symbol change display or during the execution of special games based on any special symbol success / failure determination, the predetermined number (4 each) is set as the upper limit, and the right of special symbol success / failure determination for the entry is reserved (reserved) ) Can be.

  The number of special figure hold is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two “uv” LEDs, and the first special figure is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold. The number of holds is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is 0, “u □ v □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit) is set so that both LEDs are turned off, and the number of held is 1 In this case, a display mode in which the u LED is turned off and the v LED is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”, can be used. Further, when the number of holdings is 2, a display mode in which the u LED is lit in red and the v LED is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. In addition, when the number of holds is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as “u ● v ●”. Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green as “u ▲ v ▲” to make a display mode. The second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs “wx”, and the second special figure hold is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure hold. The number is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is to turn off both LEDs such as “w □ x □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit). 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure holding display 43a.

  The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then the stop symbol is displayed. The result of the normal symbol success / failure determination based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is displayed based on the stopped normal symbol (stop symbol). Inform. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the normal symbol determination. If the stopped normal symbol is a predetermined specific symbol (a normal symbol), an auxiliary game (“specific game”) that opens the second start port 21 in an open pattern according to the current gaming state. Also called). Further, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two “st” LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination according to the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a win, the normal symbol that is turned on when both LEDs are lit is stopped and displayed, such as “s t” (for example, ■: lighted, □: lighted off). Further, when the determination result is out of place, an out-of-order normal symbol in a form in which only the LED of t is lit, such as “s □ t ■”, is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed over a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

  When there is a game ball passing to the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquisition information”) such as a random number for normal symbol determination based on the passage, and the acquired various information Is temporarily stored as a general map hold in a general map hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of pending map holds that can be stored in the pending map storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The general map reservation stored in the general map storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general map storage becomes possible. The digestion of the general symbol hold means that the normal symbol validity determination random number corresponding to the general symbol hold is determined, and the normal symbol variation display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal symbol variation display based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, during the normal symbol variation display or during the execution of the auxiliary game Can reserve (hold) the right to determine whether or not to accept a normal symbol for the passage of a predetermined number as an upper limit.

  The number of the general map hold is displayed on the general map hold display 44. Specifically, the universal map hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of “qr”, and displays the number of universal map holds by turning on the LED according to the number of general map holds. For example, when the number of hold is 0, “q □ r □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit), both LEDs are turned off, and the number of held is 1 In this case, a display mode can be adopted in which the q LED is turned off and the r LED is lit in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Also, the number of holds 2 to 4 is determined in the same manner as the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

  Next, based on FIG.2 and FIG.5, the electrical structure in this pachinko game machine 1 is demonstrated. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 ("main control unit" and "main control unit") that performs control related to gaming profits such as special symbol success / failure determination, normal symbol success / failure determination, and game state transition. (Also referred to as “game control unit”), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as “sub-control unit”, “sub-control unit”, or “effect control unit”) for performing control related to effects executed as the game progresses, game balls A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) for performing control related to payout, an effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a symbol displayed on the effect indicator 102, a third effect hold indicator 103a, And an image control board 100 (image control unit) that performs display control of the fourth effect hold display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case storing a main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, An image control board storage case storing the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case storing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. Is provided. Further, a payout control board case for storing the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for storing the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

  A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from other boards via an input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure storage unit 85 (the first special figure storage unit 85a and the second special figure storage unit 85b) and the general figure storage unit 86. .

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), a first big prize port sensor 30a, a second big prize port sensor 35a, and A general entrance sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as “detecting means”.

  The first start port sensor 20 a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21 a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a is provided in the first big prize opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first big prize opening 30. The second big prize opening sensor 35a is provided in the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35. The general entrance sensor 27 a is provided in each of the general entrances 27 to detect a game ball that has entered the general entrance 27.

  Further, as the solenoids, the second start opening solenoid 24, the first big prize winning solenoid 33, and the second big prize winning solenoid 38 are connected. The second start port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31. The second big prize winning solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36. Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special diagram hold indicator 43a, a second special figure hold indicator 43b, A figure hold display 44, a round display 45, a game state display 46, a firing direction display 47, and a hit display 48 are connected. That is, display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout device 120 for paying out a prize ball or a rental ball and a card unit 135, and the launching device 112 via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually the left side of FIG. 1), and the inserted prepaid card (game) when the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation. It is possible to lend a ball based on information stored in a value storage medium).

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) that controls the payout of the game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Driving to pay out prize balls or pay out balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launch device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 is Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling a game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. Yes. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The ROM may be externally attached.

  The sub control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 is connected to the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100. Display of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the effect display device 102, the third effect hold display device 103a, and the fourth effect hold display device 103b. Let control take place. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production symbols, holding symbols, etc.) Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads the image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The production indicator 102 is made up of two LEDs, one of which displays the change display and the stop display in accordance with the change display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED displays the change display of the second special symbol. In addition, the display mode shows the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of the special symbol success / failure determination) by lighting / extinguishing the corresponding LED or the color according to the stop display. Press to stop display. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b are each composed of two LEDs. Then, by turning on and off the two LEDs, or a combination of colors, the third effect on-hold display 103a is displayed on the hold number displayed on the first effect on-hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. Display control is performed in a display mode that indicates the same number of holds as the number of holds. The fourth effect hold indicator 103b is display-controlled in a display mode that indicates the hold number displayed in the second effect hold display region 9d and the hold number displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b. The

  The character design is displayed on a part or substantially the whole of the display screen 7a (effect design display portion), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect design display portion) to display the display screen 7a (effect design display). A part or almost all of the part) may be in a state where a part or all of the effect design 8, the first effect hold display unit 9c, or the second effect hold display unit 9d cannot be visually recognized. is there. Even in such a covering state, these effect indicators 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and so on are supplementarily so that it is possible to reliably confirm the change display and stop display of the effect symbols, the number of holds, etc. And the 4th production reservation display 103b is provided. It should be noted that the display forms of the effect display device 102, the third effect hold display device 103a, and the fourth effect hold display device 103b are in a state that can be always viewed without being obstructed by the operation of the movable decorative member 14 or the like. It has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. In addition, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute sound control. Further, in this case, acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, emits light pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinction, light emission color, etc.) for determining the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. , Lamp data) is determined from data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, the movable decorative member 14 is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the operation pattern data (also referred to as “driving data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the operated pattern data. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  Further, the sub control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Accordingly, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

  Next, a description will be given of the control related to the special symbol success / failure determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. As a result of the special symbol success / failure determination, it has “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out”. In the case of “hit”, the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When “small hit” is selected, the “small hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. In addition, in the case of “out”, the “out of symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small win, a “special game” is executed to open the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol displayed in a stopped state. . A special game executed as a big hit is called a “big hit game”, and a special game executed as a small hit is called a “small hit game”.

  There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol success / failure determination. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is the first specific result, the second specific result, the second specific result, or another specific result, etc. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game executed may differ depending on the hit type, and the amount of game profits that can be acquired by the special game differs, or the game state after the special game ends. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are “4R (round) first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “15R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “2R first big hit” "5 big hits", "2R 6 big hits", "2R 7 big hits", and "2R 8 big hits". In “15R third big hit”, the number of times of opening (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is 15. In addition, in “4R first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, and “4R fourth big hit”, the number of times of opening (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is four. “2R 5 big hits”, “2R 6 big hits”, “2R 7 big hits”, and “2R 8 big hits” are the number of open (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) 2 times. Thus, in the big hit, the first big prize opening 30 is all opened and the second big prize opening 35 is not opened. Therefore, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as “big winning big winning opening (big winning variable winning opening)”.

  In addition, “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “2R fifth big hit”, and “2R sixth big hit” are the game states after the end of the big hit game. Transition to a high probability state (activate the probability variation function). Therefore, these five types of big hits are also called “probable big hits (high probability big hits)”. This high probability state (probability changing function) continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, “4R second big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” shift the gaming state after the big hit game to a low probability state described later (the probability changing function is not activated). . Therefore, these three types of big hits are also referred to as “low probability big hits (low probability big hits, normal big hits)”.

  In addition, “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “second special symbol short time” which sets the variation time of the second special symbol in a short time after the big hit game ends. "Function" is activated and the high base generation function is not activated. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate low base state (state C). This highly accurate low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, the gameability in the high probability low base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, the right special game is performed in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged. This is a period in which a symbol hit / decision is made to generate a small hit, and the number of game balls can be increased during the period between the previous big hit and the next big hit (the big hit). In addition, by frequently hitting the small hits in the high probability low base state between the big hits, it is possible to expect a large number of game balls to be acquired in a short time by the small hits. In other words, it is a period that is advantageous to the player, and is a period during which the gaming interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, “4R second big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” activate the “second special symbol time reduction function” and “high base generation function” after the big hit game ends. Thereby, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a low-accuracy base state. In the case of “4R 2nd big hit” and “2R 8th big hit”, the low-accuracy base state ends when the next big hit occurs or when the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times. . When the special symbol variation display is terminated 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). In the case of “2R seventh big hit”, the low-accuracy base state ends when the next big hit occurs or when the special symbol variation display is executed 50 times. When the special symbol variation display is terminated 50 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the low-accuracy base state, as described above, by performing a right-handed game on the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged, the second special symbol success / failure determination is performed. This is a period in which a game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

  Also, “2R 5 big hits” and “2R 6 big hits” activate the “second special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” after the big hit game ends. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate and high base state. In the case of “2R 5th big hit”, “2nd special symbol short-time function” continues until the next big hit occurs, and “High base generation function” is the next big hit or the special symbol changes The display is terminated when the display is executed 50 times. As described above, the “probability changing function” continues until the next big hit occurs. In other words, in the case of “2R 5th big hit”, after the big hit game is over, until the fluctuation display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, it will be in a highly accurate base state. The gaming state is set to the high probability low base state.

  In the high-accuracy base state, as in the low-accuracy base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, a second special symbol success / failure determination is performed, and the game is anticipated for the next big hit. As described above, the high probability low base state is a period that is advantageous to a player who can expect to acquire many game balls in a short time by small hits by making right hits frequently. is there. It is noted that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the highly accurate and low base state than game balls that can be acquired in the highly accurate and high base state. Therefore, if the big hit does not occur until the number of times of the special symbol change display after the big hit game is over 50 times, the gaming state changes to a more advantageous gaming state (specific gaming state) than before.

  In addition, “2R 6th big hit” is a high-accuracy base state after the big hit game ends until the special symbol fluctuation display has passed 100 times, and if the big hit does not occur after 100 times, The game state is the same as “2R 5th big hit” except that the gaming state is set to the high probability low base state, that is, the period during which the gaming state changes is different. In addition, “2R fifth big hit” is set earlier than “2R sixth big hit” when the gaming state changes from the high probability high base state to the high probability low base state. Therefore, it can be said that “2R fifth big hit” is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than “2R sixth big hit”.

  In addition, a highly accurate base state after the end of the big hit game (2R fifth big hit game) related to “2R fifth big hit game” and the low level after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to “2R seventh big hit game” By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character design, reach effect, etc.) in the certain base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are set to a non-notifying state in which the gaming state (highly accurate high base state or low probability high base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

  If the type of jackpot is “2R 5th jackpot”, after the special symbol change display has passed 50 times, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and “2R In the case of “7th big hit”, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state unfavorable to the player) after 50 special symbol changes are displayed, so the player is not notified. Regardless of the gaming state, the game is played with the expectation of shifting to the high-accuracy and low-base state, and the gaming interest is enhanced.

  In addition, a highly accurate base state after the end of the big hit game (2R sixth big hit game) related to “2R sixth big hit game” and the low level after the big hit game (2R eighth big hit game) related to “2R eighth big hit game” By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character design, reach effect, etc.) in the certain base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are set to a non-notifying state in which the gaming state (highly accurate high base state or low probability high base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

  If the type of jackpot is “2R sixth jackpot”, after the special symbol variation display has passed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and “2R In the case of “8th big hit”, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state unfavorable for the player) after the special symbol variation display has passed 100 times, so the player is not notified. Regardless of the gaming state, the game is played with the expectation of shifting to the high-accuracy and low-base state, and the gaming interest is enhanced.

  Also, a high-accuracy base state after the end of the big hit game (2R fifth big hit game) related to "2R fifth big hit game" and the low level after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to "2R seventh big hit game" Highly accurate base state, high-accuracy base state after the end of the big hit game (2R sixth big hit game) related to “2R sixth big hit game”, and big hit game related to “2R eighth big hit game” (2R eighth big hit game) The player can recognize the game state by executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low-accuracy base state after the end. Make it difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. Thereby, these gaming states are set to a non-notifying state in which the gaming state (highly accurate high base state or low probability high base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

  If the type of jackpot is “2R 5th jackpot”, after the special symbol change display has passed 50 times, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and “2R In the case of “seventh big hit”, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state unfavorable for the player) after the special symbol variation display has passed 50 times. In addition, when the type of jackpot is “2R sixth jackpot”, after the special symbol change display has passed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), In the case of “2R 8th big hit”, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state unfavorable to the player) after the special symbol change display has passed 100 times. For this reason, in the non-notification state, the player is expected to shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state when the change display of the special symbol has passed 50 times in any game state. , Will enhance the entertainment interest.

  In addition, even in the case of not shifting to the high-accuracy low base state, the game expects that at least the high base state will continue (that is, the non-notification state will continue) without shifting to the low-accuracy low base state. I do. If the non-notification state continues after 50 special symbol variations have been displayed, it is expected that a big hit will occur, and when the special symbol variation display has passed 100 times, it shifts to a high-accuracy low-base state. Playing games with the expectation that they will do it will increase the fun of gaming. As described above, in the non-notification state, a point for increasing the player's expectation is set a plurality of times, so that it is possible to further increase the gaming interest and maintain a high gaming interest for a long period of time.

  In addition, as for the small hits that can occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination, the number of times of opening the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is set to 6 times, and compared to other big wins once (and The total (open) time is also set short. Specifically, a total of 1.8 seconds is released with 6 times of 0.3 seconds. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be acquired by one small hit game is set as compared with the big hit game (for example, 15R third big hit game, 4R fourth big hit game, etc.). However, by generating the small hits a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute a plurality of small hit games and acquire more game balls. Further, in the small hit, all the second big prize opening 35 is opened, and the first big prize opening 30 is not opened. Therefore, the second big winning opening 35 is also referred to as “small winning big winning opening (variable winning opening for small winning)”. Note that, in the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply called the number of open times. In addition, the probability variation function does not operate based on the occurrence of small hits, and if the gaming state at the time of small hit occurrence is a high probability state, it will be in a high probability state after the small hit game ends, and when a small hit occurs If the game state is a low-probability state, the low-probability state is set even after the small hit game ends. Similarly, the time reduction function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not operated based on the occurrence of the small hit.

  Note that the distribution probability to each big hit in the first special symbol (special drawing 1) determination is 65% for the 4R first big hit and 35% for the 4R second big hit. On the other hand, the big hit in the determination of success / failure of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is 50% for 15R third big hit, 5% for 4R fourth big hit, 5% for 2R fifth big hit, and 2R sixth big hit. 5%, 2R seventh big hit is 25%, 2R eighth big hit is 10%. In other words, if a hit / fail judgment (second special symbol success / failure determination) based on entering the second starting port 21 whose fluctuation frequency has been improved by the operation of the second special symbol short-time function described later, It becomes a big hit (15R third big hit), and it becomes possible to acquire a large amount of game balls in a short time. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game at the second start port 21 is more than a big hit in the determination of whether or not the game ball is inserted into the first start port 20 (first special symbol determination). It is set so that it is more advantageous for the player (a large amount of game balls can be obtained) to be more advantageous for the player in the determination of success / failure (second special symbol success / failure determination) performed by entering the ball. Yes. In addition, the player plays a game in anticipation of the occurrence of a highly accurate and low base state in which a game ball can be increased by a small hit along with the occurrence of the 15R third big hit.

  Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or missed is determined based on a “special symbol success / failure determination random number (also referred to as“ correction determination information ”)”, and it is a big hit The determination of the type of jackpot is based on “a random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as“ design determining random number ”or“ symbol determining information ”). As shown in FIG. 7A, the special symbol success / failure determination random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The jackpot type determination random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random number (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 includes “variation pattern” in addition to the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number. Random number (also referred to as “variation pattern information”). The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including the variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. In addition, the random numbers acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 include the normal symbol success / failure random numbers shown in FIG. The normal symbol success / failure determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second start port 21 (normal symbol success / failure determination). Normal design random numbers take values in the range of 0-240.

  Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 1, the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the second starting port are activated or deactivated. There are a plurality of game states depending on the combination of states. A state in which the probability variation function is activated for the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “high probability state”, and a state in which the probability variation function is not activated is referred to as a “low probability state”. In the high probability state (hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol success / failure determination is higher than in the low probability state (hit probability: 1/63). In other words, in the low-probability state, the jackpot determination table for the low-probability state is used to determine whether or not it is hit. The determination is made using the table (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the special symbol variation display result is a big hit (the stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol) is higher than when the special symbol probability variation function is not activated. A means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of determining whether or not the special symbol is good (big hit probability) is referred to as “probability setting means”.

  In addition, a state in which the variable time reduction function is activated for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “time-short state”, and a state in which the function is not activated is referred to as a “non-time-short state”. In the short time state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time of the fixed display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbol in the non-short time state. That is, in the short-time state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more than in the non-time-short state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the short time state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation is increased, and effective entry into the starting port (entrance that can be stored as special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage / disadvantage of the player, it is set as “second special symbol time shortening function” as shown in FIG. Yes. When the second special symbol time shortening function is not activated, that is, in the state A shown in FIG. 9, if the player plays a right-handed game and enters the game ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol The symbol special determination is executed, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. However, since the variation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (outage 10 minutes, big hit 3 minutes, small hit 2 minutes), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such state) (Also referred to as “first condition state”). Therefore, even if a right-handed game is performed in state A, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large amount of game balls. Therefore, in the state A, the game is progressed in the left-handed game aiming at the first start port 20 in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display simultaneously (in parallel). Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in the state A, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable special symbol display to end. The first special symbol can be variably displayed.

  When the second special symbol time reduction function is operating, that is, in the state B or the state C shown in FIG. 9 (this state is also referred to as “second condition state”), as shown in FIG. 2 Since the variation time of the special symbol is short, the player can play the right-handed game without reducing the ball as compared to the left-handed game (in the state B, it is maintained or slightly reduced, the state C It is possible to smoothly execute the game (the second special symbol determination determination, the second special symbol variable game). In the present embodiment, the first special symbol time reduction function is also activated during the period in which the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, but the first special symbol time reduction function may not be activated.

  The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function (second special symbol time shortening function) for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate simultaneously. The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol are operated in synchronization with the high base generation function. In other words, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), and low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy state). Does not operate in the low base state. Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol success / failure determination is higher than that in the low base state (also referred to as a “normal high probability state”). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (per hit random number) determined to be a win is larger for the state B than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C). The normal symbol hit / fail determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the ordinary symbol is a hit (the stop symbol becomes a normal symbol) is higher than when the probability variation function is not activated. .

  In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8E). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second start port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination becomes a hit in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) to release The second start port is in an open state during the period of operation. Further, when the result of the normal symbol win / reject determination becomes a win in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . The closing time between opening operations in the low base state is 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening / closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state. However, the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be opened once for 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be opened three times for 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be opened 6 times in 1.0 seconds, and may be more than the number of opening times in the low base state. In such a case, it is also said that the function of increasing the number of opening times of the variable winning device 22 is activated.

  In the high base state, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the open time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated in the high base state, compared with the low base state in which these functions are not activated. The period during which the second start port 21 is open becomes longer (the open time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second start port 21 is increased (also referred to as “high frequency state”). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the second special symbol success / failure determination increases. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the hand-held game balls.

  In addition, if the opening times are the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21 when the number of times of opening is small. In the present embodiment, the opening mode of the second start port 21 in the high base state is set to open once for 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol variation, the normal symbol variation time starts when the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state. The time is set to such a time that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 is opened before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is opened while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the opened state. In addition, in order to prevent a game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, a material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is used as a game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different). Thereby, the game ball flow speed on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed slower than the game rapid flow or the speed of the game ball passage on the front side. In addition, as an aspect for reducing the flow-down speed, the inclination angle may be loosened or an inhibiting member (such as a protrusion) for reducing the flow-down speed may be provided. In addition, thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 in the high base state does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning port. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if the second big prize opening 35 is opened (a state in which a ball can be entered) due to a small hit, the game ball that has flowed down enters the second start port 21 and the second It is difficult to enter the big prize opening 35.

  In the high base state, not all the functions described above may operate. That is, the second starting port is activated by the operation of at least one of the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the open time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol, compared to when the function is not activated. It is only necessary that 21 is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without accompanying the time-short state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is referred to as a “high base generation function”.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, since it is more advantageous for the player to determine whether or not the second special symbol is correct than to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct, the player uses the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol may be variably displayed without being variably displayed. That is, even in the normal state (low probability low base state), there is a possibility of trying to play a right-handed game. However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the variation time (average variation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the variation time (average variation time) of the first special symbol. Therefore, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state, it cannot be variably displayed many times, and the gaming efficiency is very poor. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol variably by left-handed game than to variably display the second special symbol by right-handed game. Here, “the state in which the first special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)” means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time), and the number of holds of the first special symbol is “0”. ". In addition, “the state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)” means that the second special symbol is not in a variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of the second special symbol is “0”. It means that.

  Also, in the high base state such as the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state, and the high-accuracy low-base state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened by the second special symbol time shortening function, and the right-handed game The gaming efficiency is improved. In such a case, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol determination that is advantageous to the player. Further, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is easily opened compared to the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start port 21 than to enter the first start port 20. Because it is. For this reason, a right-hand strike is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21 while allowing the game ball to pass through the gate 28 which is a trigger for determining whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate.

  In addition, in the high probability low base state, the frequency of entering the second start port 21 is the same as that in the low probability low base state (normal state), but is executed based on the ball entering the second start port 21. Since the variation time of the second special symbol is changed in a short time, a right-handed game in which the second special symbol success / failure determination which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol success / failure determination can be performed is performed. In addition, in the highly accurate and low base state, since the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the open time extending function of the variable winning device 22 are not activated, the entry to the second start port 21 is not performed. The sphere frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, the prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as the high base state. However, instead of the second special symbol success / failure determination, the small hits with a high probability (small hit probability: 300/630) prevent the game balls from being reduced during the big hits, but rather make frequent hits. It is also possible to increase the holding ball by (multiple occurrences).

  In other words, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the right-handed game frequently causes the ball to enter the second starting port 21 without greatly reducing the holding ball. 2 Aim at the next big hit by special symbol determination. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls based on the entrance to the second start opening 21 is set to one, and even if all the right-handed game balls enter the second start opening 21, The sphere will not increase (maintain). Further, in this embodiment, about 90 to 95% of the right-handed game balls are set to enter the second start opening 21, so that the high base is set unless another entry is made. If the state is continued for a long period of time, the specification is such that the ball is slightly reduced.

  On the other hand, in the high probability low base state, the right hit game causes a small hit to occur frequently by the second special symbol success / failure determination based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, and the pitch of the holding ball in the small hit game is increased. While aiming for an increase, the next big hit is generated by the second special symbol determination. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, in the high probability low base state, the longer the period in which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the period of the high probability low base state continues), the more small hits occur. There are more opportunities (to play a small hit game), which is advantageous to the player.

[Description of board configuration and game state]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), there are various entrances from the upstream side of the game area to the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first grand prize opening 30, and the second game area. 2. The starting port 21 and the second winning port 35 are arranged in the optimal order. Also, since the game ball flow path in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when these winning holes are closed, most of the game balls launched into the right game area 3B (90% ) Passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first big prize opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, and then the second second The upper opening / closing member 37 of the winning opening 35 flows down and flows down to the out opening 34. If there is an open winning opening in the middle of the flow, the ball enters the winning opening and is discharged from the winning opening to the back of the game board. It has a composition that does not exist.

  By arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball is prevented from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. Further, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the normal symbol hold becomes “0” and a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream in the right game area, almost all game balls hit right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not other winning holes are opened. Further, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the entry to other winning holes.

  When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low-accuracy base state, high-accuracy base state), it is first determined whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second start port 21 is opened. Is done. In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability per normal symbol is also set to a high probability (239/240), so the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing through (after 1 second), the movable member 23 operates to open the second start port 21. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol success / failure determination is executed and the normal symbol is variably displayed, before the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21, 2 The start port 21 is opened. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also opened once for 6.0 seconds, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. Then, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds (1 second closing → 6 .. Opening for 0 seconds-> Closing for 1 second-> Opening for about 6.0 seconds->)).

  Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second start port 21 is almost open, and most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 80 to 90%) are in the second start port 21. You will enter the ball. When the game ball enters the second start port 21, the second special symbol determination is performed. In the second special symbol success / failure determination, in the highly accurate base state, a big hit is made with a probability of 1/63, a small win is made with a probability of 30/63, and a probability is lost with a probability of 32/63.

  First, when the result of determining whether or not the second special symbol is right, the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B pass through the gate 28, and most (about 80 to 90%) of the game balls are in the open state. And the other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branching before the second start port 21 and flow down to the second start port 21 without flowing down to the third start port 21. 26 enters the ball or flows into the outlet 34. Thereby, the second special symbol success / failure determination is continuously executed. In addition, since one winning ball is discharged by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed and the next big hit is aimed at without almost reducing the holding ball. It becomes possible. In addition, one winning ball is also discharged by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit, the first big winning port 30 on the upstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in a manner corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. . Further, the second grand prize winning port 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is not opened in the big hit game. Thereby, when the big hit game is started, the game ball flowing down by the game to the right hits the first big winning opening smoothly without being blocked by other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21. Enter 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream of the first big winning port 30, the game shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 is also in the low base state. Because it is a specification that is frequently opened, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the big hit game entered the second start port 21 first, and did not enter the second start port 21 A situation occurs in which only game balls enter the second grand prize opening 30.

  Moreover, since there is only one winning ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, the execution time of the big hit game is prolonged for a long time, and the player has no merit. Rather, the game becomes redundant, and does not proceed smoothly, and there is a risk that the game interest will be reduced. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 upstream of the second starting opening 21, such a situation can be prevented and the big hit game can proceed smoothly. Become. It should be noted that since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may also block the entry to the second start opening 21 when not in the big hit game. Absent.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit, the second big winning port 35 on the downstream side of the second start port 21 is opened in the open / close state for small hits shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is open for most of the period. Therefore, about 99% (almost all) of the game balls flowing down to the second start opening 21 enter the second start opening 21 disposed on the upstream side of the second big winning opening 35. Therefore, in the high base state, even when a small hit game is executed in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened in the small base game, the second start prize 21 on the upstream side causes the second big prize on the downstream side. The entry into the mouth 35 is hindered, making it difficult to enter the second grand prize opening 35. Although the number is small (though it is unlikely), even in the high base state, when the second start port 21 is in the closed state, the game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second start port 21 When the second big prize opening 35 is open when the second big prize opening 35 is reached, the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35.

  Next, the highly accurate low base state will be described. The highly accurate low base state is a low base state, but since the variation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to advance the game with a right hand. When a right-handed game is performed in the highly accurate and low base state, first, a determination is made as to whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened (normal symbol determination). In the low base state (highly accurate low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a long time (3 seconds) compared to the high base state, and the probability per normal symbol is about half the probability of the high base state ( 120/240), after the game ball has passed through the gate, after a short time (after 3 seconds), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second start port 21 is opened. It becomes. Since the probability of winning is about ½, winning and losing occur approximately in half.

  That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol success / failure determination is executed and the normal symbol is variably displayed, the game ball that has passed through the gate passes through the entrance of the second start port 21 and then the second The start port 21 is opened. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also opened three times of 0.9 seconds (the closing time between opening is 0.1 second), as long as the right-handed game is continued, During the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, it closes, and when it hits, it is opened three times for 0.9 seconds, and when it comes off, it becomes the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds again. Looking at an example where hits and misses occur alternately, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and then opened three times for 0.9 seconds, and then the normal symbol of 3 seconds. It will be closed during the fluctuation time, will be disconnected, and will be closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and the cycle will be repeated (3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → ...).

  Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in a highly accurate and low base state, the period during which the second start port 21 is open is approximately 30%, and the period during which the second start port 21 is closed is approximately 70%. . Therefore, the high-accuracy low base state is the second start compared to the high base state that occurs when the second start port 21 is in the open state for about 90% and the closed state for about 10%. There is a high possibility that the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the mouth 21 will pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reach the entrance of the second big prize opening 35 without entering the second start port 21. . In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination will be a small hit is different in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or in the high accuracy low base state. Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 300/630). Further, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination executed in the left-handed game has no small hit, and the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination executed in the right-handed game has only the small hit. ing.

  As described above, about 70% of the game balls flowing down to the right game area (flowing down to the second start port 21) enter the second start port 21 in the high probability low base state. Instead, it flows down to the second big prize opening 35 provided downstream of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second start opening 21 is opened in the small hit opening / closing mode shown in FIG. It becomes a state. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first grand prize winning port 30 and flows down to the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is in the open state. 2 When the ball enters the starting port 21 and the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, it passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 and flows down to the second big winning port 35, and the small hit game To enter the open second prize opening 35.

  The prize balls based on the entrance to the second grand prize opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, and therefore enter the second big prize opening 35 during the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to increase the holding ball during the highly accurate low base state. In addition, since the high probability low base state continues at least until the next big hit is generated by the special symbol success / failure determination (only the second special symbol success / failure determination is performed as long as the right-handed game is continued), the high probability low base state The longer the duration is, the more players can increase their ball. In the present embodiment, on average, about 20 prize balls (two entered balls) can be obtained by generating one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (multiple times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 in ten times). Also, as a total winning ball of the “renso” period in which the right-handed game is continued, in addition to the winning ball of the big hit game, the acquired ball of the small hit game can be added, and a larger amount of gaming balls can be acquired. This also makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest.

  Further, the second big winning port 35 arranged downstream of the gate 28, the first big winning port 30 for big hit (dedicated to big hit) and the second starting port 21 (the most downstream of these) is for small hit ( It is considered as a big prize opening. In addition, the second large winning opening 35, which is a small winning large winning opening, is arranged downstream of the second starting opening 21, so that the opening of the second starting opening 21 (opening / closing control) causes a second large winning opening. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second start port 21 (the time to be in the open state, the variation time of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol determination), the high base state ( The possibility of a game ball entering the second large winning opening 35 is higher in the high-accuracy and low-base state than in the low-accuracy and high-base state). Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second large winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting port 21 (without entering the ball), 2 The effect of opening / closing control of the start port 21 is made more effective.

  In addition, even if it is the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 and the ball is almost maintained (including slight increase or decrease) (or the rate of decrease of the ball is suppressed). However, a state in which a game is played in the expectation that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination will be a big hit (an advantageous big hit) (a high base state), and a game ball is inserted into the second start port 21 to reduce the game A game state (high probability low) with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) while entering the second big prize opening 35 at the time of winning and increasing the holding ball Base state), and diversify gameplay. This also makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest. It should be noted that for the player, the gaming state is more advantageous in the high-accuracy and low-base state in which the number of balls can be increased than in the high-base state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high-accuracy high-base state, the special symbol changes for a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) in the high-accuracy high-base state. When the big hit is not made until the display is finished, the gaming state is assumed to be changed to the high probability low base state. In addition, when the game state after the big hit game is set to the high base state, it is difficult to recognize whether the high base state is the low-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy high-base state in the production symbol display section etc. A game effect is executed in a display manner. As a result, even if the gaming state after the big hit game is not in the high probability low base state but in the high base state, the game state is changed to the high probability low base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations thereafter. It is possible to play games with expectation. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the gaming interest for a long time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “2R fifth big hit” and “2R sixth big hit” are provided as types of big hits that shift from the high accuracy high base state to the high accuracy low base state. “2R 5 big hits” will change from high-accuracy high base state to high-accuracy low base state after 50 special symbol fluctuation displays, and “2R 6 big hits” will display 100 special symbols fluctuation display. After elapses, the high-accuracy high-base state shifts to the high-accuracy low-base state. Further, as the high-accuracy low base state, “2R seventh big hit” and “2R eighth big hit” are provided. “2R 7 big hits” will shift from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state (normal state) after 50 special symbol fluctuation displays, and “2R 8 big hits” will be 100 special times When the symbol variation display has elapsed, the low-accuracy high-base state shifts to the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state). In the present embodiment, the big hit game according to the four big hit types of “2R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit”, “2R seventh big hit” and “2R eighth big hit” and the high after the big hit game By executing the common effect in the base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which gaming state the player is in. That is, the non-notification state in which the gaming state is not notified is set.

  In this embodiment, the distribution rate (occurrence rate) of these “2R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit”, which are in the non-notification state, is 50 times. If the high base state (non-notification state) continues even after elapses of time, the high base state transitions to the high probability low base state after 100 times with a higher possibility than when the high base state ends after 50 times. I am going to do it. As a result, the player expects to shift to the highly accurate and low base state after 50 times, and the high base state continues without shifting to the highly accurate and low base state after 50 times ( Even when the non-informing state continues), it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the highly accurate and low base state. Thereby, it becomes possible to maintain a game entertainment interest for a long time.

  It should be noted that, instead of such a mode, even if the transition is made when 50 times have elapsed or the transition is made when 100 times have elapsed, the possibility of shifting to the high accuracy and low base state may be set to be the same. On the contrary, the possibility of shifting to the highly accurate and low base state may be higher in the case of shifting when 50 times have elapsed than in the case of shifting when 100 times have elapsed. As a result, when the high base state continues even after 50 passes, the sense of expectation for the transition to the highly accurate low base state is reduced. In addition, when another big hit type is provided and the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays has elapsed, after the second predetermined number of times greater than the first predetermined number ( It may be determined to shift to a high-accuracy low-base state (unless it is a big hit by then). On the other hand, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays has elapsed, after the second predetermined number of times greater than the first predetermined number of times has passed ( If not) it may be determined not to transition to the high accuracy low base state. In addition, when a predetermined condition (random lottery, etc.) is established in the middle of the non-notification state in the high base state, the player can display a character or character that easily recognizes the game state (executes a definite effect). You may alert | report a state.

  In addition, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit in the highly accurate low base state, or when the result is a loss, the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination in the high base state is as follows. It is the same as the case where it is a big hit and the case where it is off.

  Further, the start gate 29 is also used as the gate 28, and is provided at the most upstream in the right game area 3B. As a result, when the big hit waiting state is established, the second starting port 21 or the like does not block the passage to the start gate 29, and allows the game ball to pass through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing to start the big hit game. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In this case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28. It is necessary to provide upstream from the start port 21 and the second grand prize-winning port 35.

  In addition, when the right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be lit in a predetermined manner to notify that it should be fired to the right game area. In addition, when the left-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is turned on (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that the left game area should be fired. Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 is composed of two “yz” LEDs, and indicates the firing direction by lighting the LEDs according to the gaming state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that it should be fired to the left game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are lit, such as “y ■ z ■” (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, production symbol) is performed is “low probability low base state”, “high probability low base state”, “ It is possible to control either “low accuracy high base state” or “high accuracy high base state”. Of these, the low accuracy low base state is also referred to as “normal gaming state”, and the high accuracy low base state is It is also called “specific game state”.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main process program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counters are set. Perform a reset. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is “normal”, the special symbol is “special”, the first special symbol is “special 1” or “first special”, and the second special symbol is “special”. 2 ”or“ second special drawing ”.

  Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the value of the various random number counters shown in FIG. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interruption is permitted (S104). While the interrupt is permitted, the interrupt process (S105) can be executed. This interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed and before the next interrupt process (S105) is started, the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt process (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt process (S105), an output process (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. To do. Examples of the command to be output include information regarding the gaming state, special symbol success / failure determination, symbol as a jackpot type, variation pattern, and the like. The command is composed of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information relating to the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information relating to the content of the command.

  In the input process (S202) performed subsequent to the output process (S201), various sensors (a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a first grand prize port sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the general winning hole sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored as prize ball information in the output buffer of the RAM. Further, a detection signal from a lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the extra ball receiving tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also fetched and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower plate full data.

  Next, normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. The period until the next interrupt process (S105) is started). Thereby, randomness is given to the acquired values of various random numbers.

  Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S203), the starting port sensor detection processing (S204), the starting ball entry processing (S205), the ordinary drawing operation processing (S206), and the special figure 1 operation processing (S207) described later. ), Special figure 2 operation processing (S208), reserved ball number processing (S209), and power-off monitoring processing (S210). Thereafter, other various processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) is terminated. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command set in the RAM output buffer in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
Next, the start port sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the start port sensor detection process (S204), it is first determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol reservation balls (the number of normal symbol reservations, specifically, the counter for counting the number of general symbol reservations provided in the RAM) It is determined whether or not (value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined in S301 that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

  If it is determined in S302 that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), “1” is added to the stored number of normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. And proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random symbol counter for normal symbol determination (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the obtained random number value (acquired information, ordinary figure obtaining information) is stored in an address space corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol reserved balls in the ordinary figure reservation storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 20, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S305). If it is determined in S305 that no game ball has entered the first start port 20 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, if it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S305), the number of reserved special figure 1 balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically, the main control unit 80) It is determined whether or not the value of the counter for counting the number of first special figure reservations provided in the RAM has reached 4 (upper limit) (S306). If it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than four (NO in S306), 1 is added to the number of stored special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and special figure 1 related random numbers are acquired. Processing is performed (S308), and the process proceeds to S309.

  In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random symbol counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (label -TRND-A), the random number for determining the jackpot type The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (the random number values shown in FIG. 7A), and the acquired random values (acquisition information, special information) The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls in the first special figure storage unit 85a.

  In S309, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start port sensor 21a (S309). If it is determined in S309 that no game ball has entered the second start port 21 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the second start port 21 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 holding balls (the number of second special figure holdings, specifically the main control) It is determined whether or not the value of the counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). If it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. When it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than four (NO in S310), "1" is added to the number of stored special figure 2 reserved balls (S311), and special figure 2 relations A random number acquisition process is performed (S312), and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). Random number) and the obtained random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls in the second figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Processing at start-up]
Next, the start ball entry process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs a start-and-coming process (S205) following the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting and entering ball process (S205), it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number has increased by “1” (S315). If it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball number has increased by “1” (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second start port. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

  In S316, the latest acquired random value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit is read ( S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, the value of the random number counter for special symbol success / failure determination (random number value for special symbol success / failure determination) among the acquired random number values read out is a big hit according to the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state) If the result of the determination is a jackpot, the jackpot type is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (preliminary determination) in S317 is a preliminary determination (so-called “hold prefetching”) in which the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is held (determination of whether or not the big hit is made) is performed prior to the determination of whether the special figure 2 is determined or not in the special figure 2 determination process. ]).

  The prior determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8A), that is, a jackpot determination table for a high probability state if it is a high probability state, a normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. Further, as other prior determination modes, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a high probability state (for a high probability state) And a variation pattern information determination table. In advance determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on an acquired random number value (a value of a random symbol counter for special symbol success / failure determination or the like) and a variation pattern information determination table corresponding to the gaming state. Is possible. Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not a big hit type, whether or not a game effect with a high hit reliability is executed.

  Next, in S318, game information (preliminary determination information) related to the determination result in S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct matches the jackpot determination value (jackpot information), Information indicating the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (random number for jackpot type determination) (hit type information), information indicating whether the special symbol success / failure determination random number value matches the small hit determination value (small hit information) ), Command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (fluctuation pattern random number value) is generated as the special figure 2 start ball entering command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start entering command, a part or all of the special figure 2 acquisition random number value read in S316 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the special figure 2 acquisition random number value. The game information acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number (for example, the above-described variation pattern information) may be transmitted without transmitting as it is.

  Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 with the sub-control unit 90, whether the information is related to the big hit, which is the type of the big hit, The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering command, whether or not the special figure 2 acquisition random number acquired becomes a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and low It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when judged in the probability state. Thereby, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball entering command as a hold (effect hold information), pre-determines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not it is a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not production hold information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  For the purpose of preventing fraud, the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol is determined is not directly transmitted to the sub-control unit among the acquired random number values read out in S316, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other big hit type (big hit value) Command data including information indicating the type determination random number) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (fluctuation pattern random value) and information indicating the result of the prior determination is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command. Can be set.

  Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 has increased by “1” as in the process related to the special figure 2 described above (S319). If it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the special figure 1 number of reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process is terminated as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above with respect to FIG. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read (S321), Pre-determination is performed for the read acquired random value (S322). Then, command data including game information related to this pre-determination is generated as a special FIG. 1 start entering command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). Note that the prior determination (holding prefetching) in S322 is performed prior to the determination of the success / failure in the special figure 1 success / failure determination process described later.

[Usu Figure Action Processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a normal operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start and entry process (S205). In the normal drawing operation process (S206), the processing related to the normal symbol display unit 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. . When the “normal operation status” is “1” (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the “normal operation status” is “2” (S401). NO at S403, YES at S403), normal symbol variation processing (S404) is performed, and when the “normal figure movement status” is “3” (NO at S401, S403, YES at S405), the normal symbol is fixed Processing (S406) is performed, and when the “normal operation status” is “4” (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is “1” by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol waiting process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of held balls of the normal symbol is “0” (S501). Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in S501 that it is not “0” (NO in S501), a normal symbol success / failure determination process described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8D, if the gaming state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select the symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is the low base state (states A and C), the normal symbol variation pattern having the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection processing (S503), the normal symbol random number shift processing described later is performed (S504), then the normal symbol variation start processing is performed (S505), and the processing ends. In the normal symbol variation start process (S505), the normal symbol variation display is started with the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to “2”. In the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set to notify the sub control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol success / failure determination processing]
Next, the normal symbol success / failure determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol success / failure determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol success / failure random number counter stored in the general symbol hold storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in the high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (the hit determination) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the high-probability normal-winning determination determination based on “0” to “238”) (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for normal symbol appropriateness determination (label-TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is not ON, that is, it is determined that the low base state is set (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the low-probability normal / failure determination based on the table (the hit determination value is “0” to “119”) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal map win / fail determination (S603, S604) is a hit (per normal map) (S605), and if it is determined to be out (NO in S605), the display is stopped. A normal symbol (unusual symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal map) in S605 (YES in S605), a hit normal symbol (design per universal symbol) to be stopped is determined (S607), and the per-general symbol flag is turned ON (S608). ) Finish the process.

[Normal design random number shift processing]
Next, the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map hold in the general map storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order reserved memory in the usual figure storage area, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth figure storage area is cleared to 0 (S703). ) Finish the process. In this way, ordinary map suspension is digested in order of suspension.

[Normal symbol change processing]
Next, the normal symbol changing process (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol variation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that it has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol movement status is set to “3” (S803), and then the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at a display result (a normal symbol or a normal symbol that has come off) according to the determination result of the random number for normal symbol determination is performed (S804), and the processing ends.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the usual figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal hit flag is ON (YES in S901), it is then determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). If it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), an opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as an opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is an opening pattern that repeats opening for 1.8 seconds three times as described above. Accordingly, “3” is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is opened as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). A pattern is set (S906), and the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for state A and state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which 0.9 seconds are opened three times as described above. Therefore, “3” is set in the second start port opening counter. In S904, the normal operation status is set to “4” (S904), and this process is terminated.

[Normal electric equipment processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end-of-common-use flag is ON (S1001). The normal hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a win. If it is determined that the usual flag end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second start port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port is not open (NO in S1002), it is then determined whether or not it is time to open the second start port 21 (S1003). If determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second start port (YES in S1003), control for opening the second start port is executed (S1004), and the process is terminated. If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not it is time to close the second start port 21 (that is, after the second start port 21 is opened) Whether or not a predetermined opening time has elapsed is determined (S1005). If it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the second start port (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that the second start port is closed (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (closed) (S1006), and the value of the second start port open counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port opening counter is “0” (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not “0” (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is to open the second start port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the release counter is “0” (YES in S1008), the base game end process is performed to end the auxiliary game (S1009), and the base map end flag is set ( S1010), the process ends. The second start port opening counter becomes “0” when the second start port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times in the state B (high base state). In the state C (low base state), when the second start port 21 is opened three times, it becomes “0”. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per map is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended. Then, the usual figure end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the ordinary figure flag is turned OFF (S1012), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special Figure 1 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) following the normal operation process (S206). This special FIG. 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize apparatus 31 and the second big prize apparatus 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. If “Special figure 1 operation status” is “1” (YES in S1101), special symbol 1 standby processing is performed (S1102), and “Special figure 1 operation status” is “2”. (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), perform special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), and if “Special figure 1 operation status” is “3” (both NO in S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) ), The special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is performed, and when the “special diagram 1 operation status” is “4” (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), special electric as a big hit game The accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed, and when the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5” (S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are all NO), the processing ends. The special figure 1 operation status is “1” in the initial setting. In addition, since the small bonus is not set as the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination, the special electric accessory processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small bonus is set as the result of the first special symbol successful / bad determination. May be. In this case, when the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5”, the special electric accessory processing 2 as the small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 waiting process]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of retained balls (that is, the number of retained balls in Special Figure 1) at the first start port 20 is “0” (S1201). If it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “0”, that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry to the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), then Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in game (S1207). If it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is playing (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not playing (NO in S1207), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is being processed as a standby screen (during execution of a customer-waiting demo screen). (S1208). If it is determined that the standby screen is displayed (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not displayed (NO in S1208), standby screen setting processing for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the processing is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not “0”, that is, there is one or more random number counter values acquired based on entering the first starting port 20 (in S1201) NO), special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) to be described later. Here, “Special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not playing” means that special figure 2 is not in a variable display (including a fixed stop display time) and the special figure 2 holding ball number is “0”. Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Fail Decision Processing]
Next, the special figure 1 determination processing (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203), first, the determination value is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first special figure reservation hold). The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol adequacy determination random number counter (labeled-TRND-A) is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the big hit (S1602). If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when one of the special symbols is executing the variable display related to the big hit, in the determination of whether or not the other special symbol is successful, it is not determined whether or not the big hit, It is either off (that is, it is not determined to be a big hit). In addition, since it does not have a small hit as a result of the first special symbol success / failure determination, when the second special symbol is executing the variable display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination executed during that time is: Everything is off. If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol is not executing the fluctuation display related to the big hit (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability change flag is ON, that is, It is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (S1603). If it is determined in S1603 that the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the big hit determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the big hit determination table (FIG. 8A) Based on the table (the jackpot determination values are “3” and “397”), the determination is made (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S1603), the success / failure determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “53”, “113”, “173”, “227”, “281”, “337”, “397”, “449”. , “503”.

  In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is “big hit” (S1606). If the big hit is determined (YES in S1606), the value of the big hit type determination random number counter (label −TRND−) AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8B (S1608), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609), In FIG. 1, the big hit fluctuation flag is set to ON (S1610), and the process ends. In the case of determination of success / failure related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type determination table is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of determination of success / failure related to the second special symbol, The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. If it is determined that the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a big hit, either 4R first big hit or 4R second big hit is executed. Also, if it is determined that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, 2R One of the eighth big hits is executed (FIG. 8B). On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not “big hit” (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the off symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit fluctuation flag, the first special big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the big hit (the fluctuation display in which the big hit symbol is stopped). And a second jackpot variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a variation display related to jackpot (a variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the main control unit 80 A flag corresponding to the big hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM is set. In addition, as the small hit variation flag, a second small hit variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a variation display related to the small hit (a variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped). The flag corresponding to the small hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. Then, when the big hit variation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation display related to the big hit is being performed), in the other special symbol success / failure determination, processing for determining whether or not the big hit is made Not performed. In other words, control is not performed in which both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of gaming profit is given to the player in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress gambling.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) following the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is state A (whether or not it is a low probability low base state) (S1701). If it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON. If it is determined (YES in S1702), the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referenced with reference to the state A big hit table (the portion corresponding to state A and big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). If the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. Further, in the first embodiment, any one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 having different variation times is selected by the state A big hit table.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls (the number of held) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). When it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number detachment table (the state A in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 1 and 2), the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second hold number removal table (FIG. 9, a variation pattern is selected based on a variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state A, out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG.

  As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “3” or “4”, the variation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “1” or “2”. There is a high probability that a variation pattern will be selected. In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. Thereby, the function of the shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works, and the average variation time is shortened.

  If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low probability low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) Is determined (S1708). If it is determined in S1708 that the state is B (S1708), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and if the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1709) S1709: YES), referring to the state B big hit table (the portion corresponding to state B and big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the fluctuation is based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) Select a pattern (S1710). If it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B departure table (the portion corresponding to state B and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

  If it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), that is, the gaming state is state C (high probability low base state) (NO in S1708) Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1712). If it is decided that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (see FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state C and the portion corresponding to jackpot in the variation pattern table shown (S1710). If it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C departure table (the portion corresponding to state C and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

  In the state B and the state C, since the game is a game state in which the game is mainly based on the change display of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, if the game is performed according to the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first Fluctuation display of special symbols is rarely executed. Therefore, the variation time of the first special symbol in state B and state C is simple (the number of types is small and the variation time is also short). In the state B, when the big hit, the fluctuation pattern P15, and when it is off, the fluctuation pattern P16. In the state C, when the big hit, the fluctuation pattern P23, and when it is off, the fluctuation pattern P24.

  After the variation pattern is selected as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing is terminated. In other processing (S1704), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random Number Shift Processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is one level lower (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is composed of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003"). , The address “0000” side) (S1802). Then, “0” is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation four (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process ends. After the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) is executed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2" and a fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

[Special symbol 1 changing process]
Next, the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special diagram 1 (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process proceeds to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904.

  Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). If it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B variation counter) that counts the number of special symbol variations executed during state B (high base state) 1 is subtracted (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is “0” (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is “0” (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned OFF (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, the low-accuracy base state shifts to a low-accuracy-low base state (normal state), and the high-accuracy high-base state shifts to a high-accuracy low base state (advantageous state).

  In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to “3” (S1908), and the special symbol fluctuation display is stopped according to the result of the special symbol success / failure determination random number and jackpot type determination random number determination result. Is performed (S1909), and the process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Suspension Processing]
As shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) is in the variable display when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily interrupting the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol 1 and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game ends. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the success / failure determination process or the variable display related to the other special symbol is not executed.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902), it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901). If it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then, 2 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game according to the special figure 2 is being executed (S2902). If it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed It is determined whether or not (S2909). If it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process is terminated. And the fluctuation display of special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902) and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The interruption flag is set to ON (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is interrupted (S2904), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the fluctuation display of special figure 1 can be interrupted temporarily.

  If it is determined in S2901 that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, it is already determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted (YES in S2901), whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), it is then decided whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (S2906). If it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned OFF. (S2907), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the change display (time measurement of change time) of the 1st special symbol which was interrupted can be restarted.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, a special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and a second special symbol are displayed. A special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as “second interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display is being interrupted, and a flag corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 Is set (stored).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106), it is first determined whether or not the special symbol 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the big hit fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002). The special figure 1 big hit flag indicating execution of the big hit game related to the special symbol is turned ON (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2004. As a result, in FIG. 1, it is possible to show that the variation display relating to the big hit is completed (the big hit is confirmed) and the game is shifted to the big hit game.

  In S2004, the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game (in the case of one open once round, the round is from opening to closing of the big prize opening) is set to “4”. (S2004), in order to start the big hit game, the big hit opening command is set (S2005), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "4" (S2006), and the process is finished. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol that is variably displayed. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the special symbol variation display has ended. As a result, a big hit standby state is established. Also, if it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither big hit game nor small hit game is started, that is, the fluctuation display related to the outage. Is set to “1” (S2007), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit flag, a special figure 1 big hit flag ("first big hit flag" indicating that the result of the success / failure determination related to the first special symbol is a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. And a special figure 2 jackpot flag (also referred to as a "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the success / failure determination relating to the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When a big hit game is executed, a big hit flag corresponding to the big hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). Also, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag ("small hit flag") indicating that the result of the determination on whether or not the second special symbol is a small hit is a small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When a small hit game is executed, a small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

  Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. Specifically, when the first big hit is 4R, a display mode such as “2RΔ4R ▲ 15RΔ” (for example, ▲: on, Δ: off) is displayed. Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process (S211) shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as in S206), the following description will be simplified.

[Special Figure 2 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation and the digestion of the second special symbol retention ("change display of the first special symbol and change display of the second special symbol", "determination of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol) The success / failure determination and “)” can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the determination of success / failure based on the entry to the second start opening (second special symbol success / failure determination) is more appropriate to determine the success / failure based on the entrance to the first start opening (first special symbol success / failure). Is more likely to be a big hit (a larger amount of profits can be acquired) for the player than the (determination) (FIG. 8B).

  As shown in FIG. 30, similar to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages. “Special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each stage. If “Special figure 2 operation status” is “1” (YES in S1151), special symbol 2 standby processing (S1152) is performed, and “Special figure 2 operation status” is “2”. (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), perform special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and if “Special figure 2 operation status” is “3” (NO in S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155) ), Perform special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156), and if “Special figure 2 operation status” is “4” (NO in S1151, S1153, S1155, YES in S1157), special electric as a big hit game When the special treatment 1 (S1108) is performed and the "Special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are all NO), the special electric bonus treatment as a small hit game 2 (S1109) is performed. Note that the special figure 2 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

  Here, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211). Only the special figure 2 operation process (S211) is performed. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel, but the jackpot game and the first special symbol related to the first special symbol. This is because it is impossible to execute in parallel with the jackpot game related to 2 special symbols (only one of them can be executed). In the present embodiment, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination does not have a small hit, but as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol correct / bad determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol are not executable in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
The special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG.

[Special Figure 2 Decision Processing]
The special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowermost area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the second special figure reservation) is stored. The stored special symbol success / failure determination random number counter value (label-TRND-A) is read. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination has a small hit, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol correct / incorrect determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol success / failure determination It is determined whether the result of is a small hit (S1305). If it is determined in S1305 that the game is a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is terminated. The other processes are the same as the special figure 1 hit / fail judgment process (S1203).

[Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1254), the process (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to the second special symbol, referring to the column corresponding to the second special symbol of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select the variation pattern. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination has a small hit, if it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, a variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the gaming state.

  In the state B and the state C, the game is performed mainly based on the change display of the second special symbol (second special symbol success / failure determination). Therefore, in the state B and the state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation times) than the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a variation pattern with a relatively long time can be selected. On the other hand, in the state A, the game is played mainly by the change display of the first special symbol (first special symbol success / failure determination). Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more variation patterns (variation times) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern of a relatively long time can be selected. Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simple (the number of types is short and the time is short).

  In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, other processing (S1404) is performed, and this processing is completed. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b is shifted to one lower level (S1502). Then, “0” is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure holding storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure holding fourth (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2" and a special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the RAM output buffer to start the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. To do.

[Special symbol 2 changing process]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is performed in the same flow (S1951 to S1959) as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Suspension Processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 performs the processing (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is different from the big hit type (round counter setting process) and the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different as shown in FIG.

[Special electric equipment processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, a big hit game start process to be described later is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2102). If it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2102 that the big hit start flag is ON (YES in S2102), it is next determined whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the big hit start flag is a flag that is turned on when the player launches a game ball to the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball to the start gate 29 in the big hit standby state. . After the special symbol is confirmed and stopped with the big hit symbol and the big hit is made, the game ball is passed through the start gate, so that the big hit start flag is turned on and the big hit game proceeds (round game starts). Here, after the big hit, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29, the gaming machine is maintained in the big hit waiting state where the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave the seat and take a rest such as a toilet, a drink or a telephone. Then, after the end of the break, it is possible to advance the big hit game by firing the game ball at any timing of the player and passing the game ball through the start gate 29. The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the big winning device (first big winning device 31) has ended (the big hit game has ended) in the big hit game.

  If it is determined in S2103 that the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and is determined not to be open. If it is (NO in S2104), is it time to open the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 30) (round start time), that is, has it reached the time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round? Alternatively, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and the time for starting the next round (next release) has come (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is the round start time (YES in S2105), a round start command is set (S2106), a big prize opening process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. Thereby, the 1st big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (refer to Drawing 6) according to the kind of jackpot.

  If it is determined in S2104 that the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 30) is being opened (YES in S2104), the number of balls entered into the big prize opening in that round is the maximum number of balls that can be entered (this implementation) In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30), that is, the big prize opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls has been reached (10) (YES in S2111), or when it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that one of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process of closing the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is “0” (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not “0” (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (S2116), and the jackpot ending period Is started (S2117), the big hit end flag is turned ON (S2118), and the process is terminated. If it is determined in S2105 that the big hit end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has ended, it is next determined whether or not the big hit ending period has passed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the big hit end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the big hit flag is turned off (S2122). Then, the big hit start flag is turned off (S2123), special figure operation status setting processing 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the processing is terminated.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the big hit game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. In the big hit game start processing (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 is not yet passed in the big hit standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2152). If it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2102). Transition to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. . That is, during execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned OFF before the big hit game (round game) is started in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

  If it is determined in S2152 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning the probability variation flag OFF. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate (S2156). If it is determined that the game has passed through the start gate (YES in S2156), a big hit game is started (round game is opened). The big hit start flag is set to ON (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the vehicle has not passed the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine is continued in the big hit waiting state. If it is determined in S2151 that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process is terminated. Thereby, the player can start (advance) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game that has ended this time is related to a probable change jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, 5 types of 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, and 2R sixth big hit are probable big hits. In S2201, big hit games Determines whether any of these five types is applicable. If it is determined that it is a probability change big hit (YES in S2201), the probability change flag is turned on (S2202), and then it is determined whether the ended big hit game is the 2R fifth big hit (S2203). . If it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R fifth jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), the state B counter is set to “50” (S2205), and the processing is performed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to 50 times after the end of the big hit game, and the high probability high base state is obtained.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R fifth jackpot (NO in S2203), it is then determined whether or not the finished jackpot game is the 2R sixth jackpot (S2209). If it is determined in S2209 that the finished big hit game is the 2R sixth big hit (YES in S2209), the state B flag is turned ON (S2210), the state B counter is set to “100” (S2211), and the processing is performed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to 100 times at the longest after the big hit game ends, and a high-accuracy high base state is obtained. If it is determined in S2209 that the finished big hit game is not 2R sixth big hit, that is, 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, or 4R fourth big hit (NO in S2209), the state B flag is turned OFF. The process ends. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate low base state.

  In S2201, if it is determined that it is not probable big hit, that is, low probable big hit (low probability big hit, normal big hit) (NO in S2201), then whether the finished big hit game is 2R seventh big hit Is determined (S2206). If it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R seventh jackpot (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2207), the state B counter is set to “100” (S2208), and the processing is performed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to a maximum of 100 times after the big hit game ends, and the low probability high base state is obtained. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is not 2R seventh jackpot, that is, 4R second jackpot or 2R eighth jackpot (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned on (S2204), “50” is set in the B counter (S2205), and the process is terminated. As a result, the high base state is set up to a maximum of 50 times after the big hit game ends, and the low probability high base state is obtained.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122), it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the operation is related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 big hit flag is turned OFF (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S3001 that the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001). ), The special figure 2 big hit flag is turned off (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric equipment processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), it is first determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hitting end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) has ended in the small hit game. If it is determined that the small winning end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is being opened (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the big prize opening is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not it is time to open the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35), that is, the opening time per unit has elapsed Then, it is determined whether or not the time for starting the first opening operation has been reached, or the time for the interval between the multiple times of opening has elapsed and the time for starting the next opening operation has been reached (S2303). . As for the small hit game, regardless of passing through the start gate, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fixed stop symbol is displayed. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit game.

  If it is determined in S2303 that it is not the time to open the special winning opening (NO in S2303), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is the opening time of the big winning opening (YES in S2303), the second big winning opening 35 is released according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304). Finish. If it is determined in S2302 that the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the big prize opening during six opening operations, that is, six times It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls that have entered in the opening operation has reached the prescribed maximum number of balls (10 in this embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined in S2306 that the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2306) (NO in S2306), whether or not it is time to close the big prize opening, that is, the predetermined prize is opened after the big prize opening is opened. It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). If it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the grand prize opening during the six opening operations has reached the prescribed number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the big prize opening (second grand prize winning) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big prize opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is set. It is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit release counter is “0” (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hitting release counter is not “0” (NO in S2310), the process is terminated as it is to start the next release operation.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit release counter is “0” (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end process in S2311. In S2311, as a small hit end process to end the small hit game, a small hit ending command is set (S2311), a small hit ending period is started (S2312), a small hit end flag is set (S2313), Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes “0” when the large winning opening is opened six times.

  Also, if it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), 6 opening operations have been completed (or a specified number of game balls have entered) It is determined whether or not the small ending time has elapsed (S2315). If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), special figure operation status setting processing 2 is performed (S2317), and the processing is terminated. By generating a small hit game in a highly accurate and low base state, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls, which enhances the entertainment of the game. Note that the probability variation flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or switched from OFF to ON at the start of the small hit game. Also, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. Is determined to be related to the special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to “1” (S3103), and the processing is performed. Finish. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101) ), The special figure 2 small hit flag is turned off (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a reserved ball number process (S209) following the special figure 2 operation process (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read ( S2501). Next, the data on the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process ends.

[Power-off monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) subsequent to the reserved ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601). If it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that a power-off signal has been input (YES in S2601), the current gaming machine status (whether it is probable, whether it is a winning game, the number of held balls, (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

  As described above in detail, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is provided with the above-described characteristic configuration, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a characteristic effect that does not exist in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or compared with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. And has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a big hit in the special symbol determination (first special symbol (also referred to as “first identification information”) or second special symbol (also referred to as “second identification information”). Is based on a big hit symbol (also referred to as “specific display mode”)), a high probability state occurs (a privilege is given), and when a predetermined condition is established, a high probability state ( (Privilege) is supposed to end.

  The process of giving this high probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be called “privilege grant means”. Since the first special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), the second special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), the variable display and the stop display are performed, and the same success / failure determination result is shown. , "The special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the bonus symbol (specific display mode)". .

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub-control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, timer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub control board 90 reads out and executes the program of the sub control main process shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter reset, etc. are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the RAM contents are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. If the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. In the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned ON, data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, data related to presentation control at the time of power interruption such as a power failure is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) at power-on after power-off such as a power failure (power-off recovery), effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. Will return to the state before the power failure occurred.

  In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. For the effect determination random number, a random effect determination random number for determining the aspect of the effect symbol game effect to be executed (variation effect pattern), a notice effect determining random number for determining the notice effect, and an effect symbol determining for determining the effect symbol There are random numbers. The random number update method may be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random number, the random number value may be added two by two instead of adding one by one. The effect determining random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, a control signal (start start ball command) notifying that a start ball has been sent from the main control board 80, or a control signal (notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80) ( For example, when a variation start command) is transmitted, or when a variation effect pattern to be described later is determined. The storage location of the acquired effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

  When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as “sub output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transferred to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control. It transmits to the control board which becomes a corresponding command transmission destination among the boards 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various rendering devices (image display device, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Effect design game effects, special game effects related to winning games, etc.) are executed. Next, the production control microcomputer 91 permits interruption (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are permitted, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols and the like executed on the display screens of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. It is also possible to perform lighting control of various lamps, operation control of the movable decorative member, sound output control from a speaker, and the like.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt process (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception interrupt process (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 91. Determine (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is finished. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed whenever an interrupt pulse with a 2 msec period is input to the sub control board 90. In the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). Next, lamp data output processing (S4202) for outputting lamp data for emitting lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 and driving data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203) to be performed. The ramp data and drive data are created by a 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 10 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, switch state acquisition processing is performed in which the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt processing is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition processing Based on the data, a switch process for setting the display content of the display screen 7a is performed (S4304). Thereafter, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the effect determination random number are executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a start pitch command is received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that a start pitch command is not received (NO in S4401) When the process proceeds to S4403 and it is determined that the start pitching command is received (YES in S4401), the production hold information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4403. The production hold information storage process (S4402) is a process for determining various kinds of information (preliminary determination result, jackpot type determination disturbance) included in the start entry command (Special Figure 1 start entry command or Special Figure 2 start entry command) received in S4401. (Game information such as numerical values, fluctuation pattern random numbers) depending on the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special figure reserved balls at the time of sending and receiving the start pitching command (command generation) In the shift memory format, the information is stored in a predetermined production hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. For example, if the received start pitch command is a special Fig. 1 start pitch command corresponding to the number of held balls "4" in Fig. 1, the pre-determination result and the hit type included in the special Fig. 1 start pitch command Are stored as special figure 1 production hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 production hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used to execute various effects such as a change effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The contents stored in the production hold information storage area (production hold information) in the sub-control board 90 are stored in the special figure hold storage section (first special figure hold storage section, second special figure) in the main control board (main control section) 80 described above. This matches the stored content (acquired information) of the hold storage unit. From this, it can be said that the production hold information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also “acquired information storage means”.

  Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403). If it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4403), a variation effect start process (described later) ( S4404) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4405. If it is determined that the variation start command is not received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the variation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405). If it is determined that a variation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect design is stopped and displayed. A variation effect end process to be ended is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end process (S4406), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the effect symbol 8 that has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop effect is displayed, and the variation effect (the effect symbol game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the change stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the change effect end process. The variation effect refers to various effects performed in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol.

  Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether a hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 in executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of the big hit game (occurrence of the big hit game) ) Opening command sent at the time of the round, Round start command sent at the start of the round, Round end command sent at the end of the round, Ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, First big winning prize in round game For example, the first big prize entry command sent based on the entry to 30th, the second big prize entry command sent based on the entry to the second big prize entry in the small hit game, etc. . In S4407, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received. If not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407). Then, processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command is performed (S4408).

  For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies an opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if the command is a round start command, the command Set the round production command to specify the round production according to the round specified based on the sub output buffer, and if it is an ending command, the ending to specify the ending production according to the jackpot type specified based on the command Set the production command in the sub output buffer. In addition, if the received command is a winning game entrance command (a first winning game entrance command, a second winning game entrance command), a winning game specified based on the command (first winning game) The entrance effect command designating the entrance effect corresponding to the entrance to the entrance 30 and the second grand prize opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When various effect commands related to the set winning game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs an opening effect or a round according to the progress of the winning game. An effect, a ball effect, etc. are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed, and this process ends. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, a normal symbol variation start command and a normal symbol variation stop command) excluding the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the variation effect start process (S4402), first, an effect determination random number process (S4501) for obtaining various effect determination random numbers such as a random effect determination random number, a notice effect determination random number, an effect symbol determination random number, and the like is performed. In the present embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the variation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), the aspect of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) to be executed, the aspect of the notice effect (including presence / absence of the notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and the like are determined.

  Next, in S4502, the received variation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating the variation pattern) for designating the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In the variation pattern designation command, variation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, game state information designating the current gaming state, determination of first special symbol success determination or second special symbol success determination The result includes symbol information for designating the jackpot type (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and a variation corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern designation command, the effect symbol game effect to be started this time It is possible to determine whether the (variation display of the effect symbol) relates to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Note that the variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

  Next, in S4503, the production control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining a production mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from “1” to “5”, and each value is assigned to the production modes A to E. Specifically, mode status “1” corresponds to effect mode A, mode status “2” corresponds to effect mode B, mode status “3” corresponds to effect mode C, and mode status “4” corresponds to effect mode B. Corresponding to the production mode D, the mode status “5” corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

  Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect mainly of the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, some or all of the effect aspects of the game effect such as the notice effect and the reach effect are different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as the aspect of the effect pattern 8 (for example, the pattern design, the number design, etc.) or the characters, items, and background images that appear is different. It will be different. In addition, the production symbol game production can be executed in a mode corresponding to the production mode, and when providing a plurality of game productions (notification production, reach production, etc.), different game production can be executed depending on the production mode. It can be. In the present embodiment, the production modes A and B are executed when the low-accuracy low base state is controlled, and the production modes C and D are executed when the high-accuracy low base state is controlled. Is executed when the low-accuracy base state is controlled and when the high-accuracy base state is controlled. Therefore, when the production mode is any one of A to D, the player confirms the production mode to grasp whether the current gaming state is the low probability low base state or the high probability low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state even if the production mode is confirmed. is there. In that sense, the production mode E can be said to be a gaming state non-notification mode.

  Next, in S4504, the change display is performed using the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14 and the like, and is controlled by the sub-control unit 90 (variation effect pattern, effect design). A variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining (game effect) are set (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the change pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, the change effect pattern determination table to be used and the notice effect determination table are set. . That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set based on the gaming state (effect mode) and the like. To do. For example, when the variation pattern information designated by the received variation pattern designation command is “P1 (variation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), as a variation presentation pattern determination table, the big hit time corresponding to the current presentation mode A variation effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variation effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (the variation pattern of the effect symbol etc.), and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables (mode status) corresponding to the effect mode (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, a table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from the variation effect pattern determination tables.

  Next, in S4505, based on the random effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the variable effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variable effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. As a result, in the effect design game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach effect effect game effect), when the character effect performed using a specific character (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character In the case where the effect is not executed (non-reach effect symbol game effect) or the like is determined. The reach effect is, for example, that the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same as the display pattern of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination indicates that it is a big win In the case where a mode (a big hit mode, a specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) with a symbol (the same effect symbol) constituting the big hit mode Whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbols (three identical effect symbols) that complete the jackpot mode in a state where the remaining one is continuously displayed in a variable manner (scroll display). This refers to the production that shows. At this time, a game effect is executed using a predetermined character in accordance with the variation display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect character is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode is determined whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show in the production. Such game effects (reach effects and character effects described later) can also be referred to as story effects (specific game effects) and purpose effects (specific game effects). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit and to enhance the gaming interest.

  In S4505, based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown), the effect symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) is determined and set. The effect symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is that the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is out of reach, and if the reach is out of reach, three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as “787” are displayed. Among them, one effect symbol is different from the other effect symbols, and when it is out of reach, at least one effect symbol of three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as “635” is the other The production pattern is different

  In S4506, a notice effect to be executed in accordance with the variation effect pattern (effect symbol game effect) is determined. Moreover, it is also called an effect symbol game effect including the notice effect to be executed. This notice effect is an effect (preliminary) showing the possibility that the result of the effect effect game effect being executed will be stopped and displayed in a big hit mode before the effect symbol is stopped (determination stop display) Notification effect). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the notice effect obtained in S4501 and the notice effect determination table set in S4504, the designated effect pattern and the notice effect suitable for the determined effect pattern are selected and set. (S4506).

  Then, in S4507, based on the change effect pattern and the notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, a change effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect and the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 ( S4507), the variation production start process is terminated. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. Predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in step 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moreover, the fluctuation display (flashing display) by two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, an outline of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, when the change effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect or the like based on the change effect pattern or the like set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 On the display screen 7a, the variation display of the effect design 8 is started. An effect symbol game effect (variation effect) is configured as a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the change display of the effect symbol 8.

  In principle, the variation of the effect symbol 8 is “1” → “2” → “3”... → “7” → “8” → “9” (ascending order). Vertical scrolling) is performed by returning to “1” again when reaching “9” and repeating vertical scrolling. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol 8 is determined by the variation effect pattern stored in the above-described variation effect pattern determination table. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, various display modes such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling) and switching display in which symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling can be used. It is possible to provide a mode as a variation effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed in descending order. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a variation display mode according to the effect mode and the gaming state.

  In addition, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses. In this embodiment, the variation display is stopped. A plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) are provided as modes. Specifically, as the main stop mode, (1) The stop order (also referred to as “stop order”) of each of the design symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is “left symbol”. → Stop mode (also referred to as “first stop mode”) with “middle symbol → right symbol”, and (2) stop mode with “(left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol)” as the stop order of each symbol (“ (Also referred to as “second stop mode”) and (3) a stop mode (also referred to as “third stop mode”) in which all stop timings (stop timings) of the symbols are substantially the same (also referred to as “simultaneous stop”). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a “fourth stop mode”) in which the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same, and the middle symbol thereafter stops. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and it is determined in which stop mode the variable display is stopped depending on the variable effect pattern selected (set) in S4505. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern) can be performed separately. The first stop symbol in the stop order is also called the “first stop symbol”, the second stop symbol in the stop order is also called the “second stop symbol”, and the stop order is the third stop symbol. This is also referred to as “third stop symbol” or “final stop symbol”.

  Among the first to fourth stop modes, the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination result being “small” mainly in the production mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display is stopped when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the fact that it is “winning”.

  In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “big hit” mainly in (1) production mode A and B (state A). In the case where the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the fact that, in the case of (2) the effect mode E (state B), the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “hit” And when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”), and (3) effect mode C, In the case of D (state C), when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed by reach variation or normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being “out” or “big hit”, In the stop mode that can be executed when the variable display stops That.

  The third stop mode (simultaneous stop of all symbols) is mainly under the circumstances (1) In the production modes A and B (state A), the function of the shortening variation according to the number of special figure holding balls works. The special figure 1 reserve ball number is “3” or “4”) and the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out”, and based on this, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed with normal variation , (2) In the production mode E (state B), the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed with a normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being “out” or “small hit”. (3) When the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed in the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being “out” in the production modes C and D (state C), And (4) When the production mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is When variations in performance symbols 8 displayed based on a Koatari "is performed, a viable stop mode during the variation display stops.

  The fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol) is that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “big hit” mainly in the production mode D (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when the change display is stopped when the change display of the effect design 8 is performed by reach change.

  In this way, a plurality of stop modes when stopping the variable display of the effect symbol 8 are provided depending on the effect mode (game state) and the variation display mode and result (stop display mode) based on the result of the special symbol success / failure determination. Thus, the stop mode can be varied depending on the game situation. In addition, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 stops, it is possible to guess the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 displayed (derived display) thereafter. Through this stop mode, it is possible to infer the types of special games that can be executed, the presence / absence of execution, the possibility, and the like. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop mode when the variable display stops and to give a sense of expectation for the subsequent special game.

  In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, a stop mode (fifth stop mode) in which the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is “right symbol → left symbol → middle symbol”. ), And a stop mode (sixth stop mode) in which the stop timing of the left symbol and the middle symbol is substantially the same, and the right symbol is stopped thereafter (sixth stop mode). The conditions under which the aspect is executed are not limited to the present embodiment, and can be variously determined.

  Further, in this embodiment, the symbols “1” to “9” constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. As shown in FIG. 53, this symbol type corresponds to the gaming state (effect mode). Specifically, in state A (effect modes A and B), “7” among the odd symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “red symbol”), and other odd symbols are “1” and “3”. , “5”, “9” are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “green symbols”), and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” are blue symbols (hereinafter “blue”). It is also called “design”. On the other hand, in states B and C (effect modes C, D, and E), among odd symbols, “3”, “5”, and “7” are red symbols, and other odd symbols are “1” and “9”. Are green symbols, and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are blue symbols.

  The correspondence relationship between the design and the color according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 53 is merely an example, and other correspondence relationships can be taken, and the type of color is not limited to the present embodiment. Other colors can be used. In the present embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by color, but can be determined by elements other than colors. For example, the type of character when the character is attached to the production symbol, and the numeric design in the case of having the production design (character design) representing a predetermined character in addition to the production design (numerical design) representing the number The symbol type may be determined depending on the character symbol, or may be determined depending on the odd symbol and even symbol.

  The effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped according to the stop mode described above. The result of the variable display is notified. In the present embodiment, as the basic symbol combination (stop display mode), the “completely broken eyes” (“124”, etc.) in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all different symbols (numbers) and the effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and effect symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining effect symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a symbol (number) different from the others, such as “reach rose eyes” (“343”, etc. ) Is a detachment mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the winning game. On the other hand, “Zoro-me” (“777”, etc.) in which all of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the same is regarded as a big hit mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a big hit game of 4R or higher (see FIG. 6). Yes.

  Assuming such a basic symbol combination, in this embodiment, the “reach ballet” is also used as a 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). . This is because the 2R jackpot game has a smaller number of prize balls (the number of winning prize balls) that the player can acquire than the jackpot game of 4R or higher (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), state C (high It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), which makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase in possession) in a small hit game compared to (probably low base state), that is, for the player This is because it is a special game with a relatively low advantage (profit amount). In addition, the “completely broken eyes” among the broken eyes are also used as a small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). As described above, in the state B, since the second start port 21 is in an open state for most of the period, the small winning big winning port (the second winning port) located on the downstream side of the second start port 21 (second This is because it is difficult to enter the big prize opening 35), and the possibility of obtaining a profit from small hits is extremely low (infinitely close to zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Furthermore, a “specific breaker”, which will be described later, among the breakers is a small hit mode that triggers the execution of a small hit game (second special symbol small hit) in the state C (highly accurate low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific rosette) is also referred to as a “first display mode”, and the big hit mode (bottled eyes) is also referred to as a “second display mode”. Among the eye), the reach variation eye is also referred to as a “third display mode”, and the out-of-focus mode (complete break eye, reach variation eye) is also referred to as a “fourth display mode”.

  Since the state A (low probability low base state) is a gaming state that is basically based on the left-handed game, the first special symbol validity determination (variation display of the first special symbol) is mainly performed. Yes, since it is rare that the second special symbol validity determination (the second special symbol variation display) is performed during the first special symbol variation display, the second special symbol validity determination is performed under such circumstances. If performed, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but only the variation display (and stop display) by the effect display 102 is performed. Yes. Similarly, since the state B (high base state) and the state C (high probability low base state) are gaming states that are basically based on right-handed gaming, the second special symbol determination (second special determination) This is the case because it is rare that the first special symbol determination (change display of the first special symbol) is performed during the variation display of the second special symbol. When the first special symbol success / failure determination is performed below, the variation display of the production symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation display ( And stop display). However, when a special symbol win / rejection determination that is contrary to the current gaming state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a determination result of “big hit” is obtained (for example, in the state C, the first special symbol correctness determination If the result is a big hit), one or more display devices among the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 provide an effect display that suggests the occurrence of the big hit. Do. As a result, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (the change display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the effect display is performed in parallel with the change display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the change display of the special symbol displayed is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of a jackpot, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player loses the opportunity to gain profits by stopping the game without noticing the occurrence of the jackpot.

[Game production in state A]
Next, a game effect that is performed when the game state is controlled to the state A (low probability low base state) will be described. The game effect performed in the state A is mainly an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination. As described above, in the state A, “A” or “B” is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the effect symbol game effect in the state A is performed under a situation where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In the present embodiment, the setting and transition of the effect mode in the state A is automatically performed according to a predetermined mode control condition under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). . For this reason, the player cannot be involved in setting the production mode in the state A.

  In the state A, as the production symbol 8, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” symbols composed of blue symbols and “1”, “3”, “5”, “green symbols”, A symbol “9” and a symbol “7” consisting of a red symbol are displayed (see FIG. 53). Each of these symbols is displayed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading out the corresponding symbol image data (symbol data) from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying it on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Executed.

  Under such effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 54, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 54A), the variation display is basically the second stop mode. (Left design-> Right design-> Middle design) (see Fig. 54 (b)-> (c)-> (d), (e)-> (f)) When the function is activated (see S1707 in FIGS. 9 and 24), it is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 54 (g)). Here, when the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, reach is established (see FIG. 54 (f)). Until it stops, the reach effect is executed by the image display device or the like. The reach effect mainly develops an effect indicating whether the middle symbol (final stop symbol) stops at the same symbol as the previously stopped symbol (whether or not the big hit mode is displayed). The same holds true for states B and C regarding reach establishment and reach production.

  In this way, while the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a discrete pattern (completely broken pattern or reach variable pattern) as a result of the variable display, it is “displaced”. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a big hit mode (double eye) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed. When the big hit game is started, the display contents on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are displayed. However, it changes to the big hit game effect for 4R big hits concerning the first special symbol. When the big hit game is related to “4R first big hit”, the gaming state after the big hit game is state C (highly accurate low base state), and “4R second big hit” is related. In this case, the gaming state after the big hit game ends is the state B (low probability high base state) (see FIG. 6).

[Game production in state B]
Next, a description will be given of a game effect that is performed when the gaming state is controlled to the state B (low-accuracy base state or high-accuracy base state). Note that the high-accuracy high base state is set after the end of the big hit game based on the occurrence of “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit” in the state C (high accuracy low base state).

  The game effect performed in the state B is mainly an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination. As described above, in state B, “E” is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the effect symbol game effect in the state B is performed in a state where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In this embodiment, the setting of the effect mode E corresponding to the state B is automatically performed with the transition to the state B under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). For this reason, the player cannot be involved in the setting of the production mode E.

  In the state B, as the effect design 8, the symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” consisting of blue symbols, the symbols “1”, “9” consisting of green symbols, and red Symbols “3”, “5”, and “7” consisting of symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). Each of these symbols is displayed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading out the corresponding symbol image data (symbol data) from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying it on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Executed. In the present embodiment, the state (design) of the effect symbol 8 is different between the state A and the state B.

  Under such effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 55, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 55 (a)), the variation display is basically the third stop mode. It is stopped by (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 55B). This is because, in state B, the second special symbol time reduction function and the high base generation function are activated, so that the game can be smoothly advanced by digesting out-of-reach fluctuations and small fluctuations in a short time as much as possible. Because. When the variable display stops in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear for the player that there is no possibility of executing a special game (big hit game) immediately after the stop, so the player's expectation I won't talk to you. On the other hand, when there is an out-of-reach fluctuation or jackpot fluctuation (that is, a “reach fluctuation”), or a “reach-throwing out fluctuation” (a kind of fluctuation mode without reach), which is actually a normal fluctuation that appears to be a reach fluctuation. In this case, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 55 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → ( f)).

  While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in an out-of-phase (unevenness) as a result of the variable display, it is “out”. On the other hand, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed. Instead, a round presentation or the like is performed as the jackpot game progresses. In the state B, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the form of a big hit, the big hit game is related to “15R third big hit” or “4R fourth big hit”. A big hit game effect for 3 big hits or a big hit game effect for 4R fourth big hits is performed. Then, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is a state C (highly accurate low base state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the 2R big hit mode (reach ballet) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect for 2R big hit with the start of the big hit game. Change. When the big hit game started is related to “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit”, the gaming state after the big hit game is a high-accuracy base state (state B), When the big hit game is related to “2R seventh big hit” or “2R eighth big hit”, the gaming state after the big hit game is the low probability high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

  Furthermore, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit in the state B and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variation display is performed in the normal variation and stopped in the third stop mode. The Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely broken pattern (displacement mode) (see FIG. 55B). When the small hit is made in the state B, the small hit game is executed, but even if the small hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a remains the effect symbol game effect (in this case, the effect symbol) No. 8 is displayed in a completely broken manner), and the effect during the small hit game (small hit game effect) is not particularly performed. This is because the small hit in the state B is substantially equivalent to a loss as described above. Then, the gaming state after the end of the small hit game remains in the state B as long as it does not overlap with the transition timing of the gaming state based on the number of changes in the special symbol.

  In the state B, which is a low-accuracy base state, when a special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is displayed for a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 in this embodiment) without generating a big hit. The gaming state shifts to state A (low-probability low base state) with the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation display (displacement fluctuation), and the production mode shifts from “E” to “A” or “B”. To do. Further, when the variation display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without generating a big hit in the highly accurate base state which is the state B, The gaming state shifts to state C (highly accurate and low base state) with the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays (outward fluctuation), and the production mode shifts from “E” to “C” or “D”. .

[Game production in state C]
Next, a game effect that is performed when the gaming state is controlled to the state C (highly accurate low base state) will be described. The game effects performed in the state C are mainly based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination, the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, and the occurrence of small hits This is a production (small hit game production). The state C is an advantageous gaming state (specific gaming state) in which a lot of prize balls can be obtained from the big hits by repeating the small hits until the next big hit occurs. For this reason, in state C, a special effect in which the effect symbol game effect and the small hit game effect are linked is performed. Details of this point will be described later.

  As described above, in the state C, “C” or “D” is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the game effect in the state C is performed in a situation where a background image or the like corresponding to the effect mode C or D is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The setting of the production mode in the state C is performed under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) as in the state A and the state B described above, but in this embodiment, during the mode selection period described later. The player can select the effect mode by operating the first effect button 63a, and the effect mode C or D is set based on the selection result. In the state C, as in the state B, the effect symbols 8 are “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” symbols composed of blue symbols, and “1”, “9” symbols composed of green symbols. "3", "5", and "7" symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). In the present embodiment, the state (design) of the effect symbol 8 is the same in the state B and the state C.

  Here, in the “effect mode C” and the “effect mode D” in the state C, the contents of the game effects (effect specifications) developed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are greatly different. . Therefore, in the following, game effects in each effect mode will be described by dividing into “effect mode C” and “effect mode D”.

[Direction mode C]
As shown in FIG. 56A, in the effect mode C, the effect symbol 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and behind the effect symbol 8 is a background image corresponding to the effect mode C. A predetermined character is displayed. The characters displayed here include a teammate character (first character) and an enemy character (second character), which are displayed so that both characters confront each other. These characters are also displayed when the symbol variation display is not performed. There are a plurality of types of characters for each of the ally character and the enemy character, and one ally character (also referred to as “ally character”) and one enemy character (also referred to as “enemy character”) are in the rendering mode C. Displayed when setting. As the effect by the character (character effect), for example, the effect display is performed in such a manner that the ally character attacks the enemy character or the ally character receives an attack from the enemy character. Such an effect by the character (character effect) is performed as a variation effect based on the variation effect pattern (when it is performed in accordance with a variation display of the identification information), and the result of the variation display becomes a small hit and the small hit game is performed. There are cases where it is performed as a small hit game effect when it is performed (when it is performed in conjunction with a special game after the end of the variable display).

  Further, a right-handed instruction image M for instructing right-handed is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and the number of winning prize balls (acquired profit amount) is displayed in the lower right part (first display part) of the display screen 7a. A prize ball count image C1 is displayed. The winning ball count image C1 of the present embodiment includes an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a 5-digit number from “00000” to “99999” and a character image of “pt”. This winning ball count image C1 mainly shows the number of winning balls (the number of winning winning balls) that the player has won by the big hit game, the small hit game, etc., and the game state after the big hit game is the state B or the state In the case of C, the number of winning prize balls during that period (so-called winning ball number during the consecutive villa period) is indicated until the gaming state subsequently returns to state A (except for the big hit game). . In addition, since state C (highly accurate low base state) is an advantageous state in which small hits occur frequently (the execution frequency of the small hit games increases), winning balls (increase in possession) in the small hit games In order to produce a prize ball count image C1 is displayed. That is, as the small hit game effect, an effect display (a ball entering effect) is performed by the prize ball count image C1. Details of the effects associated with the occurrence of small hits will be described later.

  A basic flow of the variation display (variation rendering) of the rendering symbol 8 in the rendering mode C having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 57, for the sake of convenience of explanation, some display contents such as effect suspension (holding symbol), right-handed instruction image M, and background are omitted. As shown in FIG. 57, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 57 (a)), the variable display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 57). 57 (b)). This is because, in the state C, the second special symbol time shortening function operates, so that the variation without reach can be digested in a short time as much as possible so that the game can proceed smoothly. When the variation display of the production symbol 8 stops in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear for the player that there is no possibility of executing a special game (big hit game, small hit game) immediately after the stop. . For this reason, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, an effect (swing effect) for enhancing the player's expectation is not performed. On the other hand, when reach fluctuation (outgoing or big hit) or reach overcoming fluctuation is performed, the change display of the production symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 57 ( c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Further, when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being “small hit”, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed in the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → It stops at the right symbol (see FIG. 57 (g) → (h) → (i)).

  While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in an out-of-phase (unevenness) as a result of the variable display, it is “out”. On the other hand, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed. Instead, a round presentation or the like is performed as the jackpot game progresses. In the state C, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the form of the big hit of the double eyes, the big hit game is related to “15R third big hit” or “4R fourth big hit”. In this case, for the 15R third big hit Big hit game effects or 4R fourth big hit big hit game effects are performed. Then, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is a state C (highly accurate low base state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the 2R big hit mode (reach ballet) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect for 2R big hit with the start of the big hit game. Change. As a big hit game effect in this case, an effect display of the content indicating the end of the state C, that is, the end of the advantageous state where the small hits occur frequently is performed from the start to the end of the 2R big hit game. When the big hit game started is related to “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit”, the gaming state after the big hit game is a high-accuracy base state (state B), When the big hit game is related to “2R seventh big hit” or “2R eighth big hit”, the gaming state after the big hit game is the low probability high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

  Also, The result of the second special symbol success / failure determination in stage mode C (state C) is a small hit, When the variation display of the production symbol 8 based on this is performed, The variation display is performed with normal variation and is stopped in the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol). And As a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a specific break (small hit mode) (see FIG. 57 (i)). here, In this example, Left design, The middle symbol and the right symbol are all red symbols, and two of the three symbols are the same in the two adjacent symbols and the other one is a different symbol combination (“335”, “355”, “557” etc.) It is a specific break (small hit mode). The combination of symbols that make up a specific break (small hit mode) Although it won't be a reach, Because two adjacent symbols constitute the same symbol (number), Such a symbol combination is also called “reach arrangement”.

  Of the symbols ("3", "5", "7") that make up the specific rosette (first display mode), the symbols "3" and "5" constitute a specific rosette in state A Although it is a green symbol (first symbol type) that cannot be performed, in state C, it is a red symbol (second symbol type) that can constitute a specific broken eye (see FIG. 53). That is, the symbols “3” and “5” are symbols whose symbol type changes depending on the gaming state. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the player by drawing attention to the symbol type (in this example, the color type) of the effect symbol.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the effect design (“1”, “3”, “5”, “9”), which is a green design in the state A, is used in the state C with a specific break (first) The display design is a red design that can constitute a display design. For example, a part of the production design (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that is a blue design in state A is a red design. In the state A, the effect symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that are blue symbols and the effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”) that are green symbols ”,“ 9 ”) can also be made red (for example,“ 4 ”and“ 5 ”). In addition, as a symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C that does not exist in the state A may be provided, and a specific break (first display mode) may be configured by a symbol belonging to the dedicated symbol type. For example, a golden symbol (gold symbol) may be provided as a symbol type dedicated to state C, and a part of the effect symbol that is green in state A may be a gold symbol in state C. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player's attention easy by making a symbol type that can constitute a specific broken eye stand out more. Alternatively, in this embodiment, the symbols “3” and “5” that are green symbols (first symbol type) in state A are red symbols (second symbol type) in state C. In this case, In the state A, the symbol “7”, which was a red symbol (second symbol type) from the beginning, may be configured to be a gold symbol in the state C. In this case, the symbols “3” and “5”, which are red symbols (second symbol type), are symbols that can constitute a specific rosette, and the symbol “7”, which is a gold symbol (third symbol type). Can be set to a 15R big hit mode corresponding to 15R third big hit among the big hits ("7"). This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the symbol type (red symbol) that can constitute a specific rosette (small hit pattern) from the symbol type (gold symbol) that constitutes the specific Zoromorph (15R big hit feature). It is possible to clearly show the correspondence between the type and the symbol type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first stop mode (left symbol → cannot appear in other rendering modes) when the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) is derived and displayed (stopping the variable display) in the rendering mode C. It is assumed that the change display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the order of stoppage of middle symbol → right symbol). For this reason, not only the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols), but also the stop mode of the variable display that triggers the display of the small hit mode is noticed by the player. Further, in the effect mode C, the effect display that emphasizes the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) is performed at the time of the derivation display of the small hit mode (stop of the fluctuation display). Specifically, one line image extending in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) along the stop order of the first stop mode through the center of each symbol (red symbol) constituting the small hit mode, and the surroundings of each symbol An effect image E (effect effect image) composed of an image (decoration image) decorating the image is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to emphasize and display the small hit mode display (the small hit game is executed) when the variable display is stopped by the first stop mode, and when the variable display stops in the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the production effect. The aspect of the effect image E is not limited to the present embodiment, and various other aspects can be adopted.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second big prize opening 35 in the small hit game executed with the display of the small hit mode as an opportunity, the winning prize ball indicated by the prize ball count image C1 is shown for each of the balls. The number (numerical image) is added and displayed (updated). In this embodiment, the winning balls based on the balls entered into the second large winning opening 35 are 10 winning balls for each winning ball, so that the winning prize indicated by the winning ball count image C1 is shown. The number of balls is added in units of ten. Further, when a small hit game is executed with the display of the small hit mode as an opportunity, along with the execution of the small hit game, an ally character (first character) and an enemy character (which are displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a) It is assumed that the effect display (character effect) by the second character) is performed. Specifically, an effect display (also referred to as a “first effect”) in which either one of the ally character and the enemy character (for example, an ally character) attacks or places an attack on the other (for example, an enemy character). It is said. The character effect in this case (also referred to as “character effect display”) does not include a battle effect described later depicting the confrontation scenes of both characters. The execution period of the small hit game is determined according to the opening time of the big winning prize opening for the small hit (second big winning opening 35), but the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game is 1. Because it is 8 seconds, it is difficult to secure the execution time of the battle effect in this time. In this way, by performing a character effect in association with a short hit game with a short execution time, it becomes easy to make the character effect and a character effect to be performed as a variable effect, which will be described later, as related effects. Through the small hit game, it is possible to obtain an effect (character effect) with a sense of unity between the ally character and the enemy character. Here, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 associated with the small hit is a sub-command of the second big prize opening entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second big prize opening sensor 35a. The character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the reception of the control unit 90, and the small control opening command (S2066) transmitted from the main control unit 80 is received by the sub control unit 90. Since these are performed, these effects all correspond to the small hit game effects (S4407, S4408). The effect of adding and displaying the number of winning prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the winning ball count image C1 is also referred to as “first profit effect”.

  As described above, in the effect mode C (state C), the stop of the effect symbol 8 in the first stop mode and the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) occur frequently, and accordingly, in the small hit game Since the addition display and the character effect display of the prize ball count image C1 can be executed at a high frequency, such a combination of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) and the small hit game effect strongly strengthens the occurrence of the small hit to the player. It is possible to impress. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation of winning a prize ball (increased possession) due to frequent small hits, and to enhance the gaming interest of the production mode C (state C). In addition, the character effect display accompanying the small hit is performed based on the fact that the sub-control unit 90 receives the second big prize entry ball command from the main control unit 80, similarly to the addition display of the prize ball count image C1. You may comprise as follows. In this case, if the game ball does not enter the second grand prize opening 35 in the small hit game, the character effect is not performed. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second big prize opening 35, It is possible to make a strong impression on the player, and it becomes easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second big prize opening 35 in the small hit game.

  Next, the contents (effect mode) of the effect display when the reach variation (displacement or big hit) or reach disappointment variation is performed in the effect mode C will be described. As described above, in the effect mode C, the effect symbol game effect (the variation display of the effect symbol 8 or the like) is performed in a state where the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (second character) are displayed as the background on the display screen 7a. ) Is performed (see FIG. 56A). In addition, when the reach variation (displacement or big hit) is performed and when the reach dislocation variation is performed, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 stops in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol). (See FIGS. 57 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Under such circumstances, when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is started based on the variation production pattern of reach fluctuation or reach deviation variation, the left symbol (production symbol 8L) is first stopped according to the second stop mode. However (see FIG. 57 (c)), when the left symbol (first stop symbol) stops, an effect display depicting a scene in which either a friendly character or an enemy character displayed on the background attacks the opponent. (First effect) is performed. The first effect in this case is an effect (character effect) by a character (a friend character, enemy character) performed before the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) stops. The first effect is roughly divided into a pattern in which an ally character attacks an enemy character (also referred to as “first effect pattern A”), and a pattern in which an enemy character attacks an ally character (“ In addition, there are a plurality of patterns that define the content (type) of the attack to be set and the success or failure of the attack. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, the information regarding the current fluctuation display (the fluctuation) (hit reliability, the contents of the production that can be executed later, etc.) is suggested based on the content of the production when the first production is performed. (Notice). The first effect is an effect that ends when either one of the ally character and the enemy character attacks the other, and does not include a battle effect described later.

  For example, when the pattern of the first effect (also referred to as “first effect pattern”) is the first effect pattern A (a pattern in which an ally character sets an attack), at least the 2R big hit mode is not displayed as a result of the variation display. That is, it is suggested that the big hit that triggers the end of the state C, which is an advantageous state where the small hits occur frequently, does not occur. In this case, the right symbol (second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without reaching reach, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in perfect variation (disengagement mode). Although the reach has been achieved and the reach has been developed, it has been developed as a reach production, but the middle design will eventually stop at a design different from the left and right designs, and the production design 8 will be displayed in a reach-unevened manner (Reach-out fluctuation) or the effect design 8 is displayed in the form of a double-eyed (big hit mode) through a reach production (big hit fluctuation). On the other hand, when the first effect pattern is the first effect pattern B (the pattern in which the enemy character attacks), the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the end of the state C is displayed as a result of the change display. Suggest that there is a possibility. In this case, the right symbol (second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without reaching reach, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in perfect variation (disengagement mode). Although it has reached reach formation and reached reach production, the middle symbol finally stops at a symbol different from the left and right symbols, and the production symbol 8 is reach-variety (outgoing or 2R big hit) It is displayed (reaching out-of-reach fluctuation or 2R big hit fluctuation), or the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the form of a flat (hit hit) through the reach production (big hit fluctuation). In this way, by the first effect performed by the stop of the left symbol (first stop symbol), the subsequent development of the fluctuation (whether or not reach is established, whether or not it is advantageous development for the player, etc.). It is possible to suggest. Then, it is suggested that the first performance pattern A is more likely to be advantageous for the player than the first performance pattern B. Such a first effect pattern is included in the variation effect pattern, and the first effect is executed in any of a plurality of types of patterns by the variation effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above. It is determined what to do.

  After the left symbol (the effect symbol 8L, the first stop symbol) is stopped (after the execution of the first effect), the right symbol (the effect symbol 8R, the second stop symbol) is stopped according to the second stop mode. If the right symbol that stops is different from the left symbol (number), reach is not established, and then the middle symbol (the effect symbol 8C, the third symbol) stops and the variable display ends, and the effect symbol 8 is It is displayed with complete disparity (displacement). In this case, the change is a reach deviation deviation (see FIGS. 57 (c) → (e) → (f)).

  On the other hand, if the right symbol that stops following the left symbol becomes the same symbol (number) as the left symbol, reach is established. At this time, the fluctuation is a reach fluctuation (see FIGS. 57 (c) → (d)). When reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (also referred to as “second effect”) is performed on the display screen 7a. The second effect is an effect by a character (friend character, enemy character) performed after the reach is established (after execution of the first effect) while the middle symbol (the effect symbol 8C, the third stop symbol) is still changing ( In this embodiment, it is performed as a battle effect depicting a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character that have been displayed as backgrounds. The second effect (battle effect) can be broadly divided into a pattern in which a teammate character wins the battle (also referred to as “second effect pattern A”) and a pattern in which the teammate character loses the battle (battle). There are three patterns (also referred to as “second effect pattern B”) and a pattern (also referred to as “second effect pattern C”) in which the confrontation (battle) ends without winning or losing. There are a plurality of patterns that determine the type of character, which one of the friendly character and enemy character attacks first (the type of character that strikes first), the content of the attack, success or failure, and the like. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, the information about the current fluctuation display (the fluctuation) (such as the big hit reliability) is suggested based on the contents of the production when the second production (battle production) is performed. Yes.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 64A, among the second effect patterns (also referred to as “second effect patterns”), the ally character makes a first strike on the second effect pattern A (ally win pattern). There is a pattern in which the enemy character wins as it is and a pattern in which the enemy character first wins and the teammate character eventually wins. Further, in the second performance pattern B (ally defeat pattern), there is a pattern in which the enemy character defeats first and the teammate character loses. Furthermore, in the second performance pattern C (the winning / losing undecided pattern), a pattern in which an enemy character preempts the attack, but an enemy character avoids the attack, and a pattern in which the enemy character makes a preemptive attack and the friendly character withstands the attack. There is. Each of the second effects (battle effects) based on these second effect patterns starts from the first strike of the friendly character or enemy character, and the contents of the effects until the subsequent confrontation results (battle results) become clear (confrontation) Scene etc.) is predetermined according to each pattern. Such a second effect pattern is included in the variation effect pattern, and the second effect (battle) is selected from any of a plurality of patterns depending on the variation effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above. It is determined whether to execute (directing).

  In the present embodiment, the reach fluctuation in the production mode C is performed as a big hit fluctuation based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit). As a result of the display, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the form of a flat eye (a big hit mode), before the display of the big hit mode (before the derivation display), the second effect (battle) based on the second effect pattern A (ally win pattern) Production). In this case, 15R or 4R big hit game is performed after the change display is stopped (after the big hit mode is displayed), and the game state is again changed to the state C (highly accurate low base state) after the big hit game. For this reason, after the big hit game, the player can play the game in an advantageous state (state C) where small hits occur frequently again. As described above, since the game in the state C can be continued through the big hit game, the second performance pattern A is a pattern in which the teammate character wins.

  In addition, when the reach variation in the production mode C is performed as an out-of-range variation (reach out-of-range variation) based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is out-of-range, that is, as the result of the variation display, the effect symbol 8 is the reach variation. When displayed with eyes (disappearing mode), a second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect pattern C (win / loss undecided pattern) is performed before the display of the dismissal mode (before derivation display). In this case, the game in the state C is continued after the change display is stopped (after the off mode is displayed). Since the game in the state C continues as described above, the second performance pattern C is a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) ends without winning or losing.

  Further, when the reach variation in effect mode C is performed as a 2R big hit variation based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being a 2R big hit (any one of 2R fifth to eighth big hits), that is, As a result of the display, when the production symbol 8 is displayed in the reach variation (2R big hit mode), before the display of the 2R big hit mode (before derivation display), the second production based on the second production pattern B (ally defeat pattern) (Battle production) is performed. In this case, a 2R jackpot game is played after the change display is stopped (after the 2R jackpot mode is displayed), and the gaming state is changed to the state B (high base state) after the jackpot game. For this reason, for the player, the game in the advantageous state (state C) in which the small hits frequently occur is terminated with the occurrence of the 2R big hit. Thus, since the gaming state shifts from state C to state B via 2R jackpot, the second performance pattern B is a pattern in which the teammate character is defeated.

  Here, among the second performance patterns A to C, the patterns including the content of the first character attacking the teammate character are the second performance pattern A (ally win pattern) and the second performance pattern C (win / loss undecided pattern). Therefore (see FIG. 64 (a)), for the player, the battle effect (second effect) is started after the reach is established on the display screen 7a, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle effect is preempted by the ally character. In the case of starting from an attack, it can be assumed that there is at least a possibility of 2R jackpot, that is, no possibility of ending state C at that time. On the other hand, since the pattern including the content that the enemy character makes the first strike applies to all of the second performance patterns A to C (see FIG. 64 (a)), the player can reach on the display screen 7a. If the battle effect (second effect) is started after the establishment, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle effect starts from the preemptive attack of the enemy character, the possibility of 2R jackpot at that time (possible to end state C) Sex) cannot be excluded. Then, after the first attack of the enemy character, when the ally character is defeated and the battle production is ended, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern B, so the fluctuation is 2R big hit As a result, the game in the state C ends. On the other hand, after the first attack of the enemy character, when the teammate character finally wins and the battle production ends, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern A. The fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation of 15R or 4R, and when the teammate character has passed the first strike of the enemy character and the battle production is ended, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern C. Therefore, the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation, and in these cases, the game in the state C can be continuously executed. Thus, in the reach variation in the production mode C, the second production (battle production) based on the second production patterns A to C is performed, so that the advantageous state (state C) in which small hits frequently occur continues (win, undecided). ) Or finish (defeat), it is possible to obtain a production effect that stirs up the player's expectation and anxiety. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the variation effect (character effect) from the first effect to the second effect (battle effect), and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment in the effect mode C (state C). It becomes.

[Direction mode D]
As shown in FIG. 56 (b), in the effect mode D, the effect symbol 8 is smaller in the upper right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 than the other effect modes such as the effect mode C (reduced size). Displayed (also referred to as “reduced display”), a main image X imitating a fighter plane is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In the effect mode D employing such a screen configuration, usually, an effect display mainly representing a state in which a fighter aircraft flies is developed on the display screen 7a while displaying the variation of the effect symbol 8 at the upper right of the screen. It has become a thing. Then, when reach change is performed, the effect symbol 8 is displayed largely in the center of the screen as in the effect mode C described above, and a predetermined reach effect (development effect, etc.) is passed over the entire display screen after reach establishment. It is possible to use it. In this embodiment, the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed as the main effect image in the effect mode D. However, an image having a motif other than this may be displayed as the main effect image. Is possible. Also in the effect mode D, as in the effect mode C, the right-handed instruction image M and the prize ball count image C1 are displayed.

  The basic flow of the variation display (variation rendering) of the rendering symbol 8 in the rendering mode D having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 58 as well, for the convenience of explanation, some display contents such as effect suspension (holding symbol) are omitted. First, in the effect mode D, a moving image depicting a scene in which the main image X flies is usually displayed. This moving image is also displayed when the symbol variation display is not performed. When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 58 (a)), the variation display is basically in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) in the case of normal variation (displacement or small hit). It is stopped (see FIG. 58 (b)). The stop in the third stop mode is for the same purpose as the effect mode C described above. In the effect mode D, the change display mode in the case where the change display of the effect symbol 8 is performed on the upper right of the display screen 7a is a switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. . On the other hand, when reach fluctuation (displacement or big hit) or reach disappointment fluctuation is performed, the main image X is not displayed, and the effect symbol 8 that has been displayed small (reduced display) at the upper right of the screen is displayed. Largely displayed at the approximate center of the screen 7a, and its variable display is performed by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 58 (c)). Thereafter, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or in the fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol) (FIG. 58 (c) → (See (d) → (e), (c) → (e), (d) → (f) → (g)). When the variable display is stopped in the fourth stop mode (left and right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol), after the main image X is not displayed, the effect symbol 8 is displayed largely in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped almost simultaneously, and the middle symbol may be variably displayed (scrolled).

  While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in an out-of-phase (unevenness) as a result of the variable display, it is “out”. On the other hand, 4R or 15R big hit game can be executed when the production symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (Zero eyes) as a result of the variable display, and 2R big hit game can be executed if it is displayed in the 2R big hit mode (reach ballet). It becomes. Since the effects during the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game are the same as those in the effect mode C, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In addition, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit in the effect mode D (state C) and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 based on this (small variation variation) is performed, the variation display is displayed on the upper right of the screen. Thus, it is performed in the normal variation and stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 58B). At this time, as a result of the variable display, the effect design 8 is displayed in a specific break (small hit mode) (see FIG. 58 (b)). Here, in the production mode C, the variable display accompanying the small hit is stopped in the first stop mode that cannot appear in other production modes, or the effect image E (production effect image) is displayed at the time of the stop. The display of the effect design 8 is mainly shown to emphasize the occurrence of the small hit. On the other hand, in the effect mode D, the effect symbol 8 is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a with specific breakage (small hit mode), so that the notification of the occurrence of the small hit by the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8 is not so much. Although it is performed in an inconspicuous manner, an effect image different from the effect symbol 8 can be displayed at that time, and the display of the effect image may suggest (notice) the occurrence of a small hit to the player. It is supposed to be.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), a plurality of target images Y can be displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a with the start of the small hit variation. The target image Y is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter the second big prize opening 35 in one small hit game. In this embodiment, the target image Y is approximately 2 per small hit game. Since three game balls are designed to be able to enter the second grand prize opening 35 (gauge configuration), three target images Y are displayed correspondingly. The display of the target image Y is based on the variation effect pattern in the effect mode D (effect design game effect). When the hit variation effect pattern) is selected (set), the target image Y is displayed when the variation effect is executed. By displaying the target image Y in this manner, the player can estimate that the result of the variation display is a small hit. Therefore, it can be said that the target image Y is a notice effect image for notifying the occurrence of a small hit. The display of the target image Y can be included in the notice effect pattern set in the above-described S4506 without being included in the variation effect pattern.

  Then, when the small hit variation (display variation of the effect symbol 8) is stopped and the small hit mode ("355" or the like) is displayed, the small hit game is started, and the second big prize that is released by the small hit game is released. When a game ball enters the mouth 35, an effect display (also referred to as a “destructive effect”) showing how the target image Y is destroyed is performed for each entered ball (see FIG. 59B). The destruction effect is performed based on the fact that the sub control unit 90 receives the second big prize opening ball entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second big winning hole sensor 35a. It corresponds to the small hit game effect (S4407, S4408). In this embodiment, the destruction effect represents a state in which the target image Y is destroyed by a missile attack from the fighter (main image X). Further, similarly to the effect mode C, addition display of the prize ball count image C1 based on the entry into the second big prize opening 35 is also performed.

  The effect from the start of the small hit fluctuation to the small hit game is a basic effect that accompanies the occurrence of the small hit in the effect mode D. An effect based on the effect hold information stored in S4402, that is, a so-called “hold prefetch effect” is performed. This hold prefetch effect related to the small hit (also referred to as “small hit prefetch effect”) is realized by the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. That is, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs the small hit look-ahead effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. Specifically, when setting the variation effect pattern (S4505) in the variation effect start process (S4402) described above, the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 is performed.

  In the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the specific period flag is OFF (S5001). Although the details will be described later, the specific period flag is a flag that can be set to ON in S5006 to be described later when a predetermined specific period start condition is satisfied during the game in the effect mode D (state C). During the period, a special performance will be given for small hits. If it is determined in S5001 that the specific period flag is ON (NO in S5001), the process ends without performing the processes after S5002. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific period flag is OFF (not in the specific period) (YES in S5001), the second special symbol is determined as the currently stored second special symbol hold (second special figure hold). It is determined whether or not a hold whose determination result is a small hit (also referred to as “small hit hold”) is stored (S5002). This determination is performed with reference to the production hold information (preliminary determination result or the like) stored in S4402 described above, that is, the storage contents of the production hold information storage area (acquisition information storage means) of the sub-control board 90. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit hold including the second special figure hold corresponding to the variation display (also referred to as “the variation”) of the effect design 8 starting from now (S5002). Note that the small hit hold is also referred to as “specific acquisition information”.

  If it is determined in S5002 that the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is not stored (NO in S5002), the process ends without performing the processing after S5003, and the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is stored. If it is determined (YES in S5002), it is determined whether or not the small hit is continuously generated three times or more as a result of the variation display including the variation (the variation display to be started) (S5003). That is, it is determined whether or not three or more small hit holds are stored continuously including the second special figure hold corresponding to the change (S5003). This determination can also be made with reference to the production hold information stored in S4402 (stored content in the production hold information storage area).

  In S5003, when it is determined that three or more small hits are not stored continuously (NO in S5003), this process is terminated without performing the processes after S5004. In this case, the small hit prefetching effect (small hit consecutive notice) based on the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000) is not started. However, when the variation is a small hit variation corresponding to the small hit hold, as described above, the variation effect pattern including the display of the target image Y is set as the variation effect pattern related to the variation, With this variation (small hit variation), a variation effect accompanied by display of a plurality (three in this example) of target images Y is performed (see FIG. 59A). That is, there are cases where three target images Y are displayed as an effect (the change notice) suggesting the occurrence of a small hit with the change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hits are continuously stored (YES in S5003), it is determined whether or not a specific period is to be started (S5004). Here, the specific period refers to a period in which a special effect is performed as an effect related to the small hit. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit game is continuously performed three times or more, that is, it is determined that the small hit is derived as a result of each of the three or more consecutive fluctuation displays. If this is the case (YES in S5003), the specific period can be started (executable). The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs a start lottery (a kind of random number lottery for effect determination) for a specific period as a determination as to whether or not to start the specific period. In the case of winning a win (YES in S5004), the processing of S5005 to S5007 at the start of the specific period is performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the two conditions of (1) three or more small hits are continuously stored and (2) winning the start lottery of the specific period are satisfied, the specific period Is started. That is, the two conditions (1) and (2) are the start conditions for the specific period.

  If it is determined in S5004 that the specific period is to be started (YES in S5004), the specific period counter is set (S5005), the specific period flag is turned on (S5006), and the small hit prefetch effect pattern A is set (S5007). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is set without setting the specific period counter or the like (S5008). Here, the specific period counter is a counter for determining the end of the specific period. In S5005, a value corresponding to the number of small hits held determined in S5003 is set. In this embodiment, “3” or “4” is set (S5005). After setting the specific period counter in S5005, the value of the specific period counter is decremented by 1 every time the change display (small hit fluctuation) stops (ends) thereafter. The specific period flag is a flag indicating that it is during a specific period. Mainly, when a variation effect is started (S4404, S5001, etc.) or the second special figure is suspended (special figure 2 start entry command reception) ) Is a flag that is referred to when storing the production hold information based on (S4402). The specific period flag is turned OFF when the value of the specific period counter becomes zero after being turned ON in S5006.

  In this embodiment, when three or more small hits are continuously stored (YES in S5003) and the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is set. However, it may be configured to determine whether or not to set the small hit prefetch effect pattern B, and to set the effect pattern B in the case of an affirmative determination. In this way, it is possible to provide a case where a small hit pre-reading effect is executed and a case where the small hit prefetch effect is not executed when three or more small hit holds are continuously stored, so that the effects can be diversified. Become.

  When the small hit prefetch effect pattern (A or B) is set in S5007 or S5008, a variable effect start command for starting the small hit prefetch effect based on the set effect pattern together with the effect symbol game effect is displayed on the image control board 100. As a result, a small hit prefetch effect on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is started together with the effect symbol game effect. At this time, when a specific period is started and an effect based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A is performed, as shown in FIG. 61, with the start of variation display of the effect symbol 8 (first small hit variation). The main image X (see FIG. 56B) is not displayed, and the characters “continuous GET !!!!” are displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61A).

  After that, along with the display of the first small hit mode (“355” or the like) due to the suspension of the variable display, the specific period display area T (displaying the prize ball count image C2 indicating the number of prize balls won during the specific period) The second display section) appears on the left side of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (b)). The prize ball count image C2 displayed in the specific period display area T includes an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a three-digit number from “000” to “999” and a character image of “pt”. Each time one game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game executed with the display of the small hit mode, the number of winning balls to be paid out for that single winning ball An award ball number image S indicating (in this embodiment, 10) is displayed on the right side of the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61C), and the award ball number indicated by the award ball number image S is It is displayed in addition to the award ball count image C2 (the number of award winning balls) in the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (d)). In addition, during a specific period, when a game ball enters the third starting port 26 as well as the second large winning port 35, a prize ball that is paid out for each entered ball (each time one ball is entered). An award ball number image S indicating the number (1 in this embodiment) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61C), and the award ball number indicated by the award ball number image S is the award ball count image. It is displayed in addition to C2 (number of winning prize balls) (see FIG. 61 (d)). Thereby, during the specific period, the display of the winning ball number image S and the addition display of the winning ball count image C2 are easily performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the entry effect. The effect of adding and displaying the number of winning prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the winning ball count image C2 is also referred to as “second profit effect”.

  The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 are input from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the third start port sensor 26a or the second large winning port sensor 35a. This is performed based on the fact that the sub-control unit 90 receives a ball command (special figure 2 start entry command, second grand prize entry command) (S4407, S4408). In addition, since the entrance to the third starting port 26 can occur other than during the small hit game, the display of the winning ball number image S based on the entering into the third starting port 26 and the addition of the winning ball count image C2 are performed. The display can also be executed as an effect during variable display between the previous small hit game and the subsequent small hit game, for example. In addition, during the specific period, addition display of the prize ball count image C1 displayed on the lower right portion (first display portion) of the screen is not performed. This shows the number of prize balls won during a specific period (during the small hits villa period) in which a small hit game is continuously performed three times or more separately from the number of prize balls won by a small hit game when it is not a specific period. Because.

  The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 as described above are all of the small hits stored at the start of the specific period (three or four small hits held in this embodiment). ) Until the small hit fluctuation and the small hit game corresponding to) are completed. When the small hit variation and the small hit game corresponding to all the small hit holds are completed, the specific period ends, and based on the end, the specific period display area T displayed so far is erased from the screen. In addition, the prize ball count image C2 is enlarged and displayed on the screen (see FIG. 61 (e)), and the number of winning prize balls indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is lower right (first display section). An effect display that is added (summed) to the number of winning prize balls indicated by the prize ball count image C1 displayed on the screen is performed (see FIGS. 61 (e) → (f)). According to such an effect based on the small hit pre-reading effect pattern A, the effect of the profit effect (the first profit effect and the second profit effect) is given by changing the display mode of the number of winning prize balls (acquired profit amount). The effect can be enhanced. The effect display mode (display position, size, shape, etc. of the character image, specific period display area T, prize ball number image S, etc.) based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern A displayed on the display screen 7a is shown in FIG. For example, the specific period display area T is displayed in the horizontal direction near the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and the award ball number image S is displayed below the specific period display area T. For example, various display modes can be adopted.

  On the other hand, when the specific period is not started (NO in S5004) and an effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B is performed, with the start of the variation display (small hit variation) of the effect symbol 8, A plurality of the aforementioned target images Y (see FIG. 59A) are displayed on the display screen 7a. The target image Y displayed in this case is the second big prize opening in the number of small hit games corresponding to the number of small hits held (3 or 4) stored at the time when the variable display is started. 35 is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter the ball. As described above, in this embodiment, since three target images Y are displayed for each small hit game (see FIG. 59A), an effect based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B (predetermined effect) Then, nine or twelve target images Y are displayed. That is, the display number of target images Y (the production mode of the predetermined effect) differs depending on the stored number of small hits on hold. By such display of the target symbol Y, the results of the variable display that is continuously performed a plurality of times (three or four times in this example) including the variable display are all small hits (specific display results) (small display) It is possible to suggest to the player the continuous occurrence of hits). Thereafter, each time a game ball enters the second big prize opening 35 while a small hit game corresponding to the number of small hits held at the start of the production based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is performed. Then, the destruction effect of the target image Y (see FIG. 59B) is performed.

  The effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is not limited to the display of the target image Y and the destruction effect of the target image Y as in this embodiment. For example, an image such as a number or level meter that directly indicates the stored number of small hits on hold is displayed on the display screen, and the display mode of the number or level meter is used to enter the second big prize opening 35. A predetermined character image is displayed while the effect updated based on this and the small hit variation based on the small hit hold are performed, and the display mode (character movement, etc.) of the character image is changed to the second big prize opening 35. It is possible to set various effects such as effects that change based on the number of balls entered as a predetermined effect. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of effect patterns (predetermined effect patterns) corresponding to the small hit prefetch effect pattern B, and select and set one of them. In this way, it is possible to diversify the small hit prefetching effect.

  As described above, in the effect mode D (state C), while the effect display by the main image X is mainly performed (see FIG. 56B), a small hit frequently occurs, so that the player enters the second big prize opening 35. Since the effects based on the (first profit effect, second profit effect) can also be executed at a high frequency, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect related to the small hits and improve the game entertainment. In particular, when a specific period is started and a specific period display area T is displayed as a kind of small hit pre-reading effect in a situation where there are a plurality of small hit reservations ("3" or more in this embodiment), The prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 (second profit effect) are performed until the specific period ends after all the small hits are reserved, so that the prize ball number image S is displayed and It is possible to secure an execution opportunity for the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 and to increase the certainty that the display is performed. Then, after the end of the specific period, the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls during the specific period) indicated by the winning ball count image C2 is originally displayed on the lower right (first display section) of the screen. It is added (added) to the number of winning prize balls in the ball count image C1. In addition, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hit reservations ("3" or more in the present embodiment), even if the specific period is not started, a plurality of target images Y are displayed on the display screen 7a as a kind of small hit prefetching effect. The effect (small hit pre-reading effect pattern B, predetermined effect) is performed, and the effect mode (the number of display of the target image Y in this embodiment) differs depending on the number of stored small hits. As a result, it is possible to enhance the production effect by the production executed with the small hit (such as the small hit look-ahead production, the first profit production, the second profit production, etc.) and to enhance the game entertainment of the production mode D (state C). Become.

  Next, the contents (effect mode) of the effect display when the reach variation (displacement or big hit) or reach disappointment variation is performed in the effect mode D will be described. As described above, in the effect mode D, the main image X is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the effect symbol game effect (the effect symbol 8 of the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 8 is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. Fluctuation display or the like) is performed (see FIGS. 56B and 58A). In addition, when the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) is performed and when the reach off / over fluctuation is performed, the main image X is not displayed after the start of the variation display of the production symbol 8, and the upper right of the screen is displayed until then. The displayed effect symbol 8 is displayed largely in the center of the screen and is displayed in a variable manner by vertical scrolling. Thereafter, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or fourth. Stop in the stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol) (see FIG. 58 (c) and after). At this time, when the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol (number) (see FIG. 58 (e)), reach is established, and then, after the result of the variable display is displayed (derived display), the predetermined symbol is displayed. Reach production is performed. The reach effect is executed based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 described above, and the content of the reach effect varies depending on the type of the change effect pattern.

  Here, the reach effect (also referred to as “third effect”) executed in the effect mode D is similar to the second effect executed as the reach effect in the effect mode C described above. It is a battle effect (confrontation effect) depicting a confrontation scene, and has a plurality of third effect patterns having different patterns of the content of the battle effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the third effect (battle effect) in effect mode D is roughly divided into a pattern in which the teammate character wins (also referred to as “third effect pattern A”), and a friend. There are three patterns: a pattern in which the character loses (also referred to as “third effect pattern B”), and a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) ends without being won or lost (also referred to as “third effect pattern C”). For each of these three patterns, there are a plurality of patterns that define the type of enemy character, the type of character that strikes first, the success or failure of the attack, and the like. The third effect pattern A (ally win pattern) is also referred to as a “first variation effect pattern”, and the third effect pattern B (ally defeat pattern) is also referred to as a “second change effect pattern”. The effect pattern C (the winning / losing undecided pattern) is also referred to as a “third variation effect pattern”. In addition, the third effect (battle effect) pattern includes a pattern with strong attack power (for example, the type of weapon used in the attack, the type of technique, etc.) And a pattern with weak attack power (also referred to as “weak pattern”). In this embodiment, a strong pattern (also referred to as “strong friend pattern”) among patterns in which a friendly character attacks an enemy character can win a friendly character as compared to a weak pattern (also referred to as “weak friend pattern”). It is meant to indicate that it is highly probable. Of the patterns in which an enemy character attacks an ally character, a strong pattern (also called “enemy strong pattern”) is more likely to win the enemy character than a weak pattern (also called “enemy weak pattern”). It is meant to show that. With these strong and weak patterns, it is possible to suggest to the player the development and results of battle effects.

  In addition, when the reach variation or reach loss variation is performed in the effect mode D, an image (“notice image”) that informs (suggests) the content of the subsequent game that may be executed through the reach effect in the variation. (Refer to FIG. 65). The display of the notice image is a kind of notice effect (notice effect pattern) set in the above-mentioned S4506 according to the variation effect pattern in the effect mode D set in the above-mentioned S4505. When a notice effect (notice effect pattern for effect mode D) by display of the notice image is selected (set) based on an effect determination table (not shown), predetermined for execution of the variable display (variable effect) Is displayed. There are various timings for starting the display of the notice image, such as when the variable display is started, when reach is established, after reach is established, and this timing is also set according to the form of the notice effect (notice effect pattern). However, the display start timing of the notice image in the case of the change of reach loss is determined from the start of the change display until the reach is not established (the reach is not established) (for example, until the second stop symbol is stopped). . This is because the reach is not established in the case of the fluctuation of reach loss. In the present embodiment, the display start timing of the notice image in the case of the fluctuation of reach loss is the start time of the variable display. By displaying the preview image, the player can estimate the development of the game that can be executed after the change. Note that the display of the notice image is not based on the notice effect pattern, but can be included in the variable effect pattern set in S4505 described above. Further, the preview image can be said to be “information about the game after the end of the variable display”, and the effect of displaying the preview image is also referred to as “information display effect”.

  In this embodiment, when displaying a preview image, as shown in FIG. 65A, the lower part of the display screen 7a is a preview image display area U, and the preview image is displayed in the area. In FIG. 65 (a), the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) that have been stopped due to the establishment of the reach are displayed small on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a, respectively, and the reach effect is mainly in the center of the screen. The state to be performed (reach state) is shown. As a preview image that can be displayed in the preview image display area U, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a first preview image that predicts (implies) the occurrence (execution) of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit). 501 (first information), a second notice image 502 (second information) for notifying (suggesting) the continuation of the effect mode D (state C), and a notice (suggesting) for the transition to the effect mode E (state B). The third notice image 503 (third information) is provided. At the start of displaying the preview image (starting the information display effect), at least two types of the preview images can be displayed in the preview image display area U. By displaying such a preview image, it is possible for the player to make an alternative guess about the subsequent game development, and it is possible to attract the player's interest in the content (type) of the displayed preview image. Become. In addition, since the contents suggested by the first to third preview images are contents based on the game in the production mode D (state C), the presentation mode D (state C) is displayed by displaying such a preview image. ) Will be notified (suggested) of the subsequent game development based on the game in the game), and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest of the production mode D (state C). The mode (display position, size, shape, etc.) of the preview image display area U is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 65. For example, the horizontally long preview image display area U shown in FIG. 65 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Or a vertically long notice image display area U is provided on the left or right part of the display screen 7a, and the first to third notice images are arranged in the notice image display area U in the vertical direction (vertical direction). It is possible to adopt various modes such as enabling the display side by side.

  The first preview image 501 is configured to include the characters “big hit”, the second preview image 502 is configured to include the characters “continue”, and the third preview image 503 is configured to include the characters “mode E”. Is done. In the present embodiment, when displaying the preview image, two types of the preview image are displayed. As the display pattern (preview image combination), that is, the preview effect pattern, the “first preview image 501” shown in FIG. And a second preview image 502 ”, and a second display pattern for displaying“ second preview image 502 and third preview image 503 ”shown in FIG. 65 (d). . In addition to this, a display pattern for displaying “first notice image 501 and third notice image 503” may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that there are three types of notice images. For example, when 15R third big hit and 4R fourth big hit are separately (differentiated) for notice, or when there are more types of big hits. More types of preview images may be provided, such as providing a preview image according to the type of jackpot. In this case as well, at least two types of notice images may be displayed in the notice image display area U, and the display pattern of the notice image (notice effect pattern) can be arbitrarily determined.

  Which one of the first notice image 501, the second notice image 502, and the third notice image 503 is displayed is determined by the type of notice effect (notice effect pattern) set in S4506 described above. For example, when reach fall off fluctuation is performed (reach roll off fluctuation production pattern), the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the second notice image 502 from the start of the change and The third preview image 503 (second display pattern) is displayed in the preview image display area U (upper part of the display screen 7a), and this display is caused by the stop of the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R). This is done until reach failure is confirmed. Then, after the start of displaying the preview image (after the start of the information display effect), when the reach failure is confirmed, the previously displayed preview image is erased from the screen. In this case, the change display of the effect symbol 8 ends (stops) without the reach effect thereafter.

  Here, the determination (selection) of the display pattern when displaying the preview image includes the display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 referred to when setting the preview effect by displaying the preview image in S4506, The display pattern determination random number takes a value in the range of 99. The feasibility of each display pattern is determined according to the selection rates of the first display pattern and the second display pattern determined by this display pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 66, in the reach deviation variation, both the display of the preview image by the first display pattern and the display of the preview image by the second display pattern can be executed. In the present embodiment, the former The latter is more likely to be executed (selection rate of the first display pattern “30%”, selection rate of the second display pattern “70%”).

  On the other hand, when a reach change is performed (reach change effect pattern), the change is a big hit change based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) In other words, when the effect design 8 is displayed as a double eye (big hit mode) as a result of the variable display (big hit variation mode pattern), the third effect is displayed before the big hit mode is displayed (before derivation display). A third effect (variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern) based on the pattern A (friend victory pattern) is performed. In addition, since the big hit game is performed after the change display is stopped (after the display of the big hit mode), and the game in the state C can be continued thereafter, the third effect pattern A (first change effect pattern) is It is a pattern in which an ally character wins. Then, in the fluctuation (big hit fluctuation), for example, a notice image is displayed (information display effect) at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the third effect (battle effect) starts, for example, when the change starts or when reach is established. Is started. The display of the preview image in this case can be executed based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern. When the display of the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502 is started based on the first display pattern (see FIG. 65 (c)), the player at least as a result of the change (battle effect) It can be inferred that there is no possibility that 2R jackpot will occur, that is, there is no possibility that the game in the state C will be terminated (the possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous). On the other hand, when the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 is started based on the second display pattern (see FIG. 65 (d)), the player generates a 2R jackpot at that time. The possibility (possibility that later game development will be disadvantageous) cannot be excluded.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the preview image when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A (the battle effect that becomes the ally victory) is executed with the big hit fluctuation is more first than the second display pattern. The possibility of executing with the display pattern is increased (see FIG. 66). For this reason, the display of the preview image with the first display pattern displays the expected degree of ally victory in the battle effect, that is, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a big hit mode compared to the display of the preview image with the second display pattern. It can be said that the degree of expectation (big hit reliability) that a game (15R big hit game or 4R big hit game) is executed is high. In addition, when the battle effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on the “strong teammate pattern” due to the big hit variation, the possibility of displaying the preview image by the first display pattern is made higher. (See FIG. 66).

  Further, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is the “strong friendship pattern” and the display of the preview image is the first display pattern, a predetermined time after the display of the preview image (for example, the friend character and the enemy is displayed). It is assumed that the first notice image 501 (big hit) may be displayed in an enlarged manner in the notice image display area U in the notice image display area U at the start of the battle of the character or at a predetermined time before the battle, such as during a match). (See FIG. 65 (e)). This enlargement display of the notice image is based on the notice effect pattern set in S4506 described above, and when the notice effect pattern including the enlargement display of the notice image is selected (set), the enlargement display of the notice image is performed. Done. As the first preview image 501 is enlarged, the second preview image 502 (continuation) is displayed smaller than the display start time or is deleted (in this embodiment, deleted). That is, the display mode of the preview image being displayed in the preview image display area U changes. As a result, the third effect (battle effect) to be executed is based on a strong team pattern, and a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) may occur as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). It is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation, security, etc. by suggesting that the player is high. In the case where the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is erased, the display may be a notice of big hit confirmation (big hit confirmation notification). Further, after the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is reduced and displayed, the first notice image 501 is further enlarged or the second notice image 502 is deleted. You may change the display mode of the notice image currently displayed on U in steps. Further, as a change in the display mode of the preview image, for example, the “big hit” character in the first notice image 501 is changed to “super big hit” suggesting 15R big hit, the “big hit” character or the background color is changed. For example, the character, color, shape, or the like constituting the preview image may be changed. Furthermore, such a change in characters and the like and a change in display size (enlarged display, reduced display, etc.) of the present embodiment may be combined and executed.

  On the other hand, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on a pattern other than the “strong friendship pattern”, that is, the “ally weak pattern”, “strong enemy pattern”, or “enemy weak pattern”. In any of these three patterns, the first preview image 501 is not enlarged and the display mode of the preview image does not change. The display of the notice image in the notice image display area U is performed until the third effect (battle effect) or the end of the change display. It should be noted that even when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is other than the “strong friendship pattern”, the first preview image 501 can be enlarged and displayed in this case. Compared to the above, the feasibility of enlarged display (display mode change) may be lowered. This makes it easy to understand the relationship between the battle effect pattern (strong pattern, weak pattern) and the enlarged display (display mode change) of the preview image.

  In addition, when reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is performed as an out-of-range variation (reach out-of-range variation) based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is out-of-range, that is, When the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the reach variation (displacement mode) as a result of the variation display (reach out-variation variation effect pattern), the third effect pattern C (not winning or losing) is displayed before the display of the deviating mode (before derivation display). A third effect based on the settlement pattern) (a variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern) is performed. In addition, since the game in the state C is continued after the change display is stopped (after the display of the off-state), the third effect pattern C (third change effect pattern) is confronted (battle) without winning or losing. The pattern is finished. And in the said fluctuation | variation (reaching out-of-reach fluctuation | variation), for example at the time of the start of the said fluctuation | variation, reach establishment, etc., at the predetermined time in the said fluctuation | variation before the 3rd production (battle production) starts, the 1st notice image 501 The display of the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. At this time, when the preview image is displayed according to the first display pattern, the player has no possibility of generating at least 2R jackpot (possibility of ending state C) as a result of the change (battle effect). Can be guessed. On the other hand, when the preview image is displayed according to the second display pattern, the player may have at least a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) as a result of the change (battle effect). I can guess that. In the present embodiment, the first display pattern and the second display are used to display the preview image when the third effect based on the third effect pattern C (a battle effect that has not been won or lost) is executed due to a fluctuation in reach. The selection rate of each pattern is set to 50% so that the execution possibility is the same for each pattern (see FIG. 66).

  Here, the display of the notice image by the first display pattern (big hit or continuation) is also a display that suggests that the game in the state C can be executed after that, so that the game in the state C is ended. The player will not be worried about getting lost. On the other hand, the display of the preview image by the second display pattern (continuation or effect mode E) cannot eliminate the possibility that 2R big hit will occur, and may not be able to continue the game in the state C. Since it also includes sex, it gives such anxiety to the player. The display of the notice image by the first display pattern or the second display pattern in such a deviation in reach is displayed at a predetermined time after the display is started (for example, a predetermined time such as when a teammate character and an enemy character are confronting or at the end of the confrontation). Only the second notice image 502 (continuation) is displayed, and the other notice images (first notice image 501 or third notice image 503) are deleted (change in display mode of the notice image). Thereby, the player recognizes that the big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) is not generated as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect), and the game in the state C is continued. Can do. In this way, the display of the preview image in which only the second preview image 502 (continuation) is finally left in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

  It should be noted that, in the case of out-of-reach fluctuation, a big hit mode is not displayed as a result of the fluctuation display (a big hit is generated), so the first warning image as described above is displayed in the warning image display by the first display pattern. The enlarged display of 501 is not performed. In addition, it is possible to configure so that the enlarged display of the second preview image 502 of the first display pattern or the second display pattern can be executed after starting the display of the preview image by the first display pattern or the second display pattern in the case of the reach fluctuation. The second notice image 502 is a notice image for notifying (suggesting) the continuation of the state C in which small hits occur frequently, and the enlarged display of the second notice image 502 does not provide the player with the profit due to the occurrence of the big hit. Since the advance notice (suggestion) that the continuation possibility of the state C is high, it is possible to alleviate the player's anxiety that the game in the state C is ended.

  Further, in the case where reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being 2R big hit (any of 2R fifth to eighth big hits). When the 2R big hit variation is performed, that is, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the reach of the reach (2R big hit variation effect pattern) as a result of the variable display (2R big hit variation effect pattern), before the display of the 2R big hit variation mode (before the derivation display) ), The third effect (variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern) based on the third effect pattern B (friend defeat pattern) is performed. After the change display is stopped (after the 2R big hit mode is displayed), the 2R big hit game is played, and the game state after the big hit game becomes the state B (high base state), and the game in the state C is continued. Since it becomes impossible, the 3rd production pattern B (2nd variation production pattern) becomes a pattern in which a friendly character loses. And in the said fluctuation | variation (2R big hit fluctuation | variation), for example at the time of the start of the said fluctuation | variation, reach establishment, etc., the 2nd notice image 502 and the 2nd notice image are given at the predetermined time in the said fluctuation | variation before the 3rd production (battle production) starts. 3 The display of the preview image 503 (second display pattern) is started. Based on the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503, the player estimates that there is a possibility of occurrence of 2R big hit (possibility of ending state C) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). be able to. In the present embodiment, the display of the notice image when the third effect based on the third effect pattern B with the 2R big hit variation (the battle effect of ally defeat) is not executed in the first display pattern. It is assumed that the process is executed only with the second display pattern (see FIG. 66). This is because the game in the state C is ended by the occurrence of the 2R big hit (relative to the display of the preview image by the first display pattern (notification effect suggesting relatively advantageous game development)) (relative (This is a disadvantageous game development) because it is cruel to the player. By doing so, when the preview image is displayed and the third effect (battle effect) is aligned, the notice image is displayed (information display effect) and the third effect (battle effect) is executed. It is possible to prevent feelings from being held.

  Thereafter, the display of the notice image by the second display pattern in the fluctuation (2R big hit fluctuation) is performed at a predetermined time after the display is started (for example, a predetermined time such as during the confrontation between the friendly character and the enemy character or at the end of the confrontation). Only the third preview image 503 (effect mode E) is displayed, and the second preview image 502 (continuation) is deleted (change in display mode of the preview image). As a result, the player recognizes that two big hits (any of 2R fifth to eighth big hits) have occurred as a result of the change (battle effect), and the game in state C has ended. it can. In this way, the display of the notice image that only the third notice image 503 (effect mode E) finally remains in the notice image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

  As described above, in the effect mode D, when reach variation or reach deviating variation is performed, based on the variation effect pattern related to the variation, the content of the game (game development) that can be executed after the variation is notified (suggested). The preview image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen 7a (preview image display area U). This notice image includes a first notice image 501 (first information) for notifying (suggesting) the occurrence of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) that triggers the setting of state C (highly accurate low base state). And a second notice image 502 (second information) for notifying (suggesting) the continuation of the state C, and a notice (suggesting) that the gaming state shifts to the state B (game end in the state C) triggered by a 2R jackpot 3) a third preview image 503 (third information). The display pattern of these preview images includes a first display pattern composed of a combination of the first preview image 501 and the second preview image 502, and a second preview image. And a second display pattern composed of a combination of 502 and the third preview image 503. For the display of the preview image based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern, the third effect from the start of the change in reach change before the reach failure is determined from the start of the change in reach deviation change. By starting at a predetermined time before the result of (battle effect) becomes clear (before the battle effect or the end of the change), state C (an advantageous state with frequent small hits) continues (win) In other words, it is possible to obtain an effect that stirs up the player's expectation and anxiety, such as whether to finish (defeat) or end (defeat). In addition, when the reach fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation, depending on the third effect (battle effect) of the change (stronger ally pattern, weaker ally pattern, etc.), the third effect is executed after the display of the preview image is started. The display mode of the preview image displayed at that time can be changed at a predetermined time during the battle (during battle production). Such a change in the display mode attracts the player's interest in the displayed preview image, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the subsequent game development will be advantageous to the player, at an early stage before the end of the change, It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation and security.

[Mode selection period]
Next, a mode selection period for selecting the effect mode in state C will be described. As described above, when the gaming state is controlled to the state C (highly accurate low base state), one of the presentation modes C and D is set, and selection of the set presentation mode is set. Can be performed based on the operation of the first effect button 63a by the player. This selection of the effect mode can be executed at a predetermined time when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (highly accurate low base state) occurs. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit” and “4R fourth big hit” are big hits that trigger the setting of state C (highly accurate low base state) (see FIG. 6). ), The production modes C and D can be selected at a predetermined time when these big hits occur.

  In the present embodiment, at a predetermined time after the start of the big hit game, a mode selection period is generated in which the production mode after the big hit game is ended can be selected from the two production modes C and D. The generation timing (occurrence timing) of the mode selection period is different between “4R first big hit” and “4R fourth big hit” and “15R third big hit”. It should be noted that control processing related to the production mode selection, such as the generation of the mode selection period and the selection of the production mode based on the operation of the first production button 63a during the mode selection period, is performed by the sub control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91). It is executed under the control, and more specifically, it is executed by the winning game effect process (S4408) of the received command analysis process (S4302).

  First, when a big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in state A (left-handed game) and “4R first big hit” occurs, that is, when “4R first big hit” occurs as the first hit, Mode selection when a big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in B or C (right-handed game) and a “4R fourth big hit” occurs, that is, a “4R fourth big hit” occurs as a villa The period occurs in the ending period after all rounds of 4R jackpot game are completed. Here, as described above, when the final round of the big hit game ends (when the value of the round counter becomes “0”), the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets the big hit ending command and (S2116), the jackpot ending period is started (S2117). When the sub-control unit 90 receives the ending command, the sub-control unit can recognize the start of the ending period. The ending commands are, for example, “4R ending command” for “4R first big hit” and “4R fourth big hit”, and “15R ending command” for “15R third big hit”. It is provided according to the type of jackpot. The ending period is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses. In this embodiment, the ending time for the 4R jackpot game is “15 seconds”, and the ending time for the 15R jackpot game is “5”. Seconds ". Note that the ending time shown in this embodiment is an example, and can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the specifications of the gaming machine, game playability, and the like.

  When receiving the ending command, the sub control unit 90 transmits an ending effect command corresponding to the received ending command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, an ending effect is executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When this ending effect is triggered by the 4R ending command, as shown in FIG. 62, a mode selection screen 700 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a as the ending effect. The mode selection screen mainly includes an image 701 indicating “effect mode C” (hereinafter also referred to as “mode C selection image”) and an image 702 indicating “effect mode D” (hereinafter also referred to as “mode D selection image”). Are arranged side by side and an image 703 simulating the first effect button 63a (hereinafter also referred to as “button image”) is arranged between the left and right. By displaying such a mode selection screen 700, the player is notified that the mode selection period is in progress.

  When the player operates the first effect button 63a while the mode selection screen 700 is displayed, an image 701 (mode C selection image) and an image 702 (mode D selection image) to be selected alternately for each operation. The highlighted image (that is, the rendering mode) is displayed as being selected (see FIGS. 62A and 62B). In the present embodiment, the selected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed (highlighted) as an aspect surrounded by a thick frame, and the unselected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed darkly (dark display). Yes. Accordingly, the player operates the first effect button 63a so that the mode selection image corresponding to the desired effect mode is highlighted, thereby selecting the effect mode in the subsequent state C (highly accurate low base state). can do.

  In this embodiment, the mode selection period after the end of 4R is 10 seconds from the start of the ending period. Then, at the timing when 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of the mode selection period (start of the ending period), a countdown display indicating the remaining period until the end of the mode selection period is started on the upper side of the button image (FIG. 62 (c)). reference). The countdown display is performed in such a manner that the numeric image 704 is displayed by subtracting one by one from “3” → “2” → “1”. By this countdown display, the player is notified that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the selection period ends). When the numeric image 704 becomes “1” in the countdown display, the countdown display ends soon after, and the mode selection period ends. At this time, the mode selection image that is highlighted (enclosed by a thick frame) is displayed as the selected effect mode (selection result). Thereafter, until the end of the ending period, an effect display (not shown) indicating the transition to the state C is executed on the display screen 7a. The effect mode (C or D) selected in this way is set as the effect mode of state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in state C, the effect mode (C or D) set (selected). A directing game effect is executed.

  On the other hand, when a big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in the state B or C (right-handed game) and a “15R third big hit” occurs, that is, “15R third big hit” occurs as a villa. In this case, the mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the 15R big hit game. Specifically, in this embodiment, the mode selection period is from 1R to 15R from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R. Here, as described above, with the start of the round game, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets a round start command (S2106), and the sub control unit 90 receives the round start. The start of the round game can be recognized on the sub-control unit side. The round start command is provided according to the number of rounds to be started (executed), for example, “1R start command”, “2R start command”,... “15R start command”.

  When the sub-control unit 90 receives a “13R start command” that specifies the start of the round game immediately before 14R (predetermined round game) that is the start round of the mode selection period, that is, the start of 13R, it responds to this. The round effect command to be transmitted is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, a 13R round effect is executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In the 13R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63A, the 13R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A notification screen 810 indicating that the mode can be selected from the next round (14R) is displayed. By displaying the notification screen 810, the player is notified that the mode selection period starts from the next round (14R in this embodiment) (notification before starting the selection period, first notification means). Thus, after notifying in advance that the production mode can be selected (the mode selection period is started), the production mode in a new mode such as the occurrence (start) of the production mode selection period is reached. Selection becomes possible. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract a player's interest in selection of production mode.

  The round effect screen 800 also displays a predetermined round effect image (not shown), an image indicating the current number of rounds, a prize ball count image C1, and the like. The winning ball count image C1 displayed here is added and displayed for each ball entered based on the ball entering the first big winning opening 30 during the big hit game (reception of the first big winning opening entry command). It is displayed continuously even in the state C after the big hit game ends, and the first big in the second big winning opening 35 in the subsequent small hit game or the first big in the big hit game An addition is also displayed by entering the winning opening 30. Therefore, the winning ball count image C1 displays the total number of winning balls acquired during the consecutive period from the beginning.

  Next, when receiving the “14R start command” designating the start of 14R, which is the start round of the mode selection period, the sub control unit 90 transmits a corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). To do. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a 14R round effect is executed. In the 14R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the 14R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed. This mode selection screen 900 has the same screen configuration as the mode selection screen 700 (see FIG. 62) in the mode selection period generated during the ending period of the 4R jackpot game described above, and the mode selection screen 700 is reduced. Yes. The display of the mode selection screen 900 notifies the player that the mode is being selected (notification during the selection period, second notification means). The production mode selection on the mode selection screen 900 (upper and lower switching of the mode selection image) is the same as the production mode selection on the mode selection screen 700 described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b). Therefore, the detailed description about effect mode selection in 14R is abbreviate | omitted. It should be noted that the screen configuration (display contents) of the mode selection screen 900 may be different from part or all of the mode selection screen 700 displayed in the mode selection period during the ending period, and the entire display screen 7a has a mode. The selection screen 900 may be displayed.

  Next, when receiving the “15R start command” designating the start of 15R following the start round (14R) of the mode selection period, the sub-control unit 90 sends the corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). ). In response, a 15R round effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 15R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the 15R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed. At this time, on the mode selection screen 900, the countdown display is started with the start of 15R. This countdown display is the same as the countdown display (see FIG. 62C) on the mode selection screen 700 during the ending period described above, and the numeric image changes from “3” to “2” as 15R progresses. It decreases to “1” (see FIG. 63D). By this countdown display, the player is informed that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period, third notification means). Then, the countdown display ends in the middle of 15R (when about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of 15R), thereby ending the mode selection period.

  Thereafter, the mode selection screen 900 is displayed together with the round effect screen 800 on the display screen 7a until 15R ends, and the selected effect mode (selection result) is displayed on the mode selection screen 900. This selected effect mode (C or D) is set as the effect mode of state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in state C, the effect mode (C or D) set (selected). The directing game effect is executed.

  As described above, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (highly accurate low base state) occurs, at the predetermined time after the big hit game related to the big hit has been started, "Or" Mode D "mode selection period occurs. Regarding the generation timing (start timing) of this mode selection period, when 4R first big hit occurs in state A (left-handed game) and 15R third big hit occurs in state B or C (right-handed game) The time of occurrence differs depending on the case. In other words, the timing for generating the mode selection period differs between the initial hit in state A, which is a game state in which a left-handed game is played, and the hit state in state B or C, which is a game state in which a right-handed game is played. It has become a thing. In another way, the type of jackpot game to be executed (type of jackpot), that is, 4R jackpot game (4R first jackpot, 4R fourth jackpot) or 15R jackpot game (15R third jackpot) The generation timing of the mode selection period differs depending on whether or not For this reason, depending on the game state when the big hit occurs (whether it is the first hit or the consecutive villa) and the type of big hit game to be executed, the timing at which the presentation mode can be selected varies, It is possible to make the aspect different.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when a 4R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period is generated during the ending period after all round games have ended, and the mode selection screen 700 is displayed (see FIG. 62). On the other hand, when a 15R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period occurs (starts) in the middle of 14R through 15R (final R) during the jackpot game, but in the 13R before the mode selection period occurs (before the start) Then, a notification screen 810 for notifying that the mode selection period starts from the next round is displayed (notification before starting the selection period, see FIG. 63 (a)). In 14R, the mode selection period occurs and the mode selection screen 900 is displayed. Displayed (notification during selection period, see FIG. 63 (b)), and countdown display is executed in 15R (notification before the end of the selection period, see FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d)). Thus, in the 4R jackpot game, the player is given the opportunity to select a production mode after the end of all round games. In the 15R jackpot game, the player has the opportunity to select the production mode before all round games are finished. Given to. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the production mode selection from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to give a different impression to the player regarding the production mode selection.

  Also, the ending period for 4R jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds is longer than the ending period for 15R jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, and the mode selection period is generated using the ending period for the 4R jackpot. ing. For this reason, it is possible to wipe down as much as possible the negative image for the player that the number of rounds (number of winning prize balls) is small compared to 15R jackpot and the execution period of the jackpot game is short, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest. Become.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a 15R jackpot game is executed, the player is prompted to select an effect mode after the jackpot game over a plurality of round games (13R to 15R in this embodiment). Yes. For this reason, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in selecting the production mode. Further, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R (predetermined round game) to the middle of 15R (next round game), and the notification (selection period) related to the production mode selection from the start to the end of the mode selection period. Notification before start, notification during selection period, notification before selection period end). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to select the production mode without noticing the occurrence of the mode selection period.

[Other aspects]
In this embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are set according to the game state as a special symbol (the first special symbol described later or The display is changed in synchronization with the change display of the second special symbol). That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and is synchronized with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the gaming state, thereby synchronizing with the first special symbol. And a case of being synchronized with the second special symbol. Instead of such a mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variation display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is displayed as the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display. Further, when both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) set as the main subject of the game in the gaming state is displayed large (the main subject) The effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) that is not the main subject of the game may be displayed small. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Also, not always displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, but displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol according to the gaming state and the game situation, and the first There may be a case where one of the effect symbol and the second effect symbol (the main symbol) is displayed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the gaming machine described above, a “variable entrance” that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter, and a state where the game ball cannot enter, “Special game execution means” capable of executing a special game that allows the variable entrance to enter a ball when the result of the 1-win / no-go determination or the second win-win determination is successful. In addition, the “second starter” may be a variable starter that can be changed between the first mode and the second mode in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. In addition, a game state (first game state) in which a game ball enters the variable start port has a predetermined frequency, and a game in which a game ball enters the variable start port is higher than the game state. “Game state setting means” for setting the state (second game state) may be provided. Here, “predetermined frequency” includes zero.

  In this embodiment, the number of times of opening the first grand prize port or the second grand prize port in one round is set to one, but a plurality of times of opening the first grand prize port or the second grand prize port in one round are provided. It is also possible to have a round of different opening times. In the present embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed simultaneously, but the second special figure hold is given priority over the first special figure hold. Also, a so-called special figure 2 priority control process, a control process in which the first special figure reservation is prioritized over the second special figure reservation, or a so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be used. In addition, the priority order is not set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are digested in order from the oldest stored one. Control processing, that is, control processing of so-called order of entering (memory order) digestion may be used.

  Also, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and can enter a game ball that can enter and a game ball can enter There is a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and if the result of the determination of success or failure based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit, the large winning opening is made available for a predetermined time. This is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed when a game ball enters a big winning opening in a ball ready state and the game ball passes through a specific area, and a big hit game is executed. This pachinko gaming machine is called a so-called “1 type 2 type mixing machine”. When the result of the determination of success / failure based on the ball entering the start opening becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of entering game balls into the start opening. Moreover, it has a 1st starting port and a 2nd starting port, and it shall generate | occur | produce the high base state which raises the entrance frequency to the 2nd starting port. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

  In the above-described embodiment, the probability of hitting the jackpot can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by the non-operation / operation of the probability variation function. Is not limited to this. For example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Also good. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. A plurality of types of probability conditions that define the relationship between the low probability and the high probability are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selected), for example, when the gaming machine is turned on. Also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure holding storage unit is read and the acquired acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined for the prior determination based on the starting entry. Although (pre-determination) is performed ("starting ball entry process (S205)", see FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the pre-determination method is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure holding storage unit, an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on starting entry) to be subjected to prior determination is stored in the main control unit and sub-control. The acquired information stored in the storage area (preliminary determination storage unit) may be determined (preliminary determination). In this case, it is possible to erase the acquisition information (acquisition information stored in another storage area) used for the preliminary determination by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit. Or it is good also as what pre-determines about the acquisition information acquired based on starting entrance instead of pre-determining about the acquisition information memorize | stored in the special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. That is, it may be determined in advance before the acquired information is stored in the special figure storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquisition information to be subjected to prior determination separately from the special figure storage unit, and it is also necessary to read out the acquisition information stored in the special figure storage unit for the preliminary determination. Absent.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the production mode D (state C, specific game state), when a specific period is started under a situation where three or more small hits are continuously stored, during the specific period Is a display of the winning ball number image S and the additional display of the winning ball count image C2 (second profit effect) based on the winning at the big winning prize winning opening etc., and when the specific period ends, An effect is provided in which the number of winning prize balls indicated by the ball count image C2 is added (summed) to the number of winning prize balls (total number of winning prize balls, total number of winning prize balls) of the winning ball count image C1. It was. On the other hand, when a new second special figure hold (entrance to the third start port 26) occurs during a specific period, and the hold is determined to be a small hit hold by a prior determination (hold prefetch) The specific period currently being executed may be extended. For example, it is assumed that a specific period is started in a situation where four small hit holds are continuously stored, and two small hit holds are digested after the start. At this time, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “2”. Under that circumstance, if a new second special figure hold occurs and the special figure 2 hold ball count becomes “3” and it is determined in advance that the hold is a small hit hold, a specific period counter (see S5005) “+1” (add 1). Thus, the specific period is extended until the newly generated (stored) small hit hold is digested and the small hit game related to the small hit hold is completed. Alternatively, after the start of a specific period, two special hits have been digested and the special figure 2 reserve ball count is "2". It is assumed that the second special figure hold and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number “4” occur in succession. Then, the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number “3” is a release hold, and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number “4” is a small hit hold beforehand. Assume that it has been determined. In this case, by incrementing the specific period counter (see S5005) by “+2” (added by 2), the small hit hold corresponding to the special figure 2 number of held balls “4” is consumed, and the small hit variation and the small hit game are completed. Until then, the specific period can be extended. In this way, by extending the specific period after the start of the specific period, a period in which the display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display (second profit effect) of the prize ball count image C2 is performed. Since it extends, it becomes possible to raise the effect effect of profit production more.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned embodiment, two conditions, (1) that three or more small hits are continuously stored, and (2) winning the start lottery of the specific period, are set to the start of the specific period. However, the start condition for the specific period is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of (for example, two or more) small hits hold are stored although they are not continuous, and a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more) small hits hold is stored regardless of whether they are continuous or not. It is good also as a start condition of a specific period. In this case, the start condition of the specific period is relaxed as compared to the embodiment, and the specific period is more likely to occur (easily started). Moreover, it is good also considering only the start condition of a specific period as (1) among (1) and (2) mentioned above.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a big hit that triggers setting of the state C (highly accurate low base state) occurs, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C before shifting to the state C When the big hit is 4R big hit (4R first big hit, 4R fourth big hit), the mode selection period occurs during the big hit game ending period, and the 15R big hit (15R first big hit) In the case of 3 big hits, the mode selection period is assumed to occur in a predetermined round game (in the present embodiment, from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R). On the other hand, if the number of jackpot rounds that triggers the setting of state C is one type of 10 rounds, for example, if the gaming state when the 10R jackpot occurs is state A (left-handed game), the ending period A mode selection period may occur during a predetermined round game (for example, 9R start to 10R midway) if a mode selection period occurs during state B or C (right-handed game). Among these, in the latter case, in the round before the mode selection period occurs, notification that the mode selection period starts from the next round (notification before selection period start) may be performed. In addition, the generation time when the mode selection period is generated in the round game during the big hit game, that is, the round that becomes the mode selection period is not limited to the embodiment, for example, from 5R start to 6R end. It may be generated in any round such as only the last round. Further, when the mode selection period is generated during the jackpot ending period, a notification that the mode selection period will be started (notification before the start of the selection period) is performed in the round effect of the final round before the ending period starts. It may be.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned Example, presentation mode selection (selection of presentation mode C or D) in the mode selection period was enabled based on operation of the presentation button. On the other hand, the production mode selection in the mode selection period may be automatically selected from among a plurality of production modes determined in advance by lottery or the like on the sub-control side. In this case, for example, with the start of the mode selection period, a roulette image (one mode selection screen) showing a plurality of effect modes divided into roulettes is displayed on the display screen of the image display device. An effect (roulette effect) in which one effect mode is determined (selected) by roulette lottery may be performed as an effect during the mode selection period (mode selection effect). In the present embodiment, there are two types of effect modes in state C (effect modes C and D), but three or more effect modes may be selected from among them.

  In addition, the aspect related to the variation display of the effect symbol shown in the above-described embodiment (variation aspect, stop aspect, reach effect aspect, etc.), the effect executed with the small hit in the state C (effect modes C, D) (Small-look prefetching effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, etc.), notice effect in display mode D (display of notice image), notification screen related to mode selection period, mode selection screen, etc. Various aspects of the effects are merely examples, and the aspects of the effects according to the present invention are not limited to the examples.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when displaying the preview image in the effect mode D, the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a (preview image display area U) of the image display device 7. On the other hand, you may comprise so that a preview image may be displayed on other image display apparatuses with which the said game machine is provided, such as the display screen 71a of the 2nd image display apparatus 71, and the display screen 72a of the 3rd image display apparatus 72. . Further, in addition to the image display device composed of a liquid crystal display, other display means (effect display device) for other effects such as a dot display and a drum display are provided, and the display mode is used for the above-described effect mode D. A notice effect corresponding to the display of the notice image may be executed.

[Others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification are disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that includes a display means for performing variable display of identification information, and based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result, a special game advantageous to a player can be executed. Yes. In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to indicate (notify) the result of the variable display to the player by the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. (For example, refer to JP 2008-370A).

  In the gaming machine having the display means as described above, the player proceeds with the game while paying attention to the identification information displayed on the display means. However, the player feels bored of the game while the display of the variation of the identification information is repeated many times, making it difficult to maintain interest in the game. The present invention 1 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to realize display of a new aspect that attracts the player's interest with respect to the display of identification information, and to improve the game entertainment. There is to plan.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 for solving the above-described problems is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition and notifying the result of variable display in accordance with the display mode of identification information when the variable display is stopped,
Fluctuation display means capable of displaying identification information fluctuation display,
The fluctuation display means includes
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode.
The stop mode at the time of stopping the variable display can be varied depending on the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display.

  According to such a gaming machine, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode when the variable display is stopped while the variable display means performs the variable display of the identification information. The stop mode can be made different depending on the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped. For this reason, the player pays attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information stops, and can guess the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) thereafter. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of reference invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-1 described above,
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols,
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, at least a first stop mode in which the stop order of the plurality of symbols is a predetermined first stop sequence, and a stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first stop sequence. A second stop mode that is a second stop order different from the stop order,
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, at least a first display mode that triggers execution of a predetermined special game and a second display that triggers execution of another special game different from the predetermined special game And a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game,
The fluctuation display means includes
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the first stop mode,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and the variation display of the identification information is performed by the variation display of these symbols. In such a configuration, as a stop mode when stopping the variation display of the identification information, that is, a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols, at least the stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first stop order. Identification information when the variable display is stopped, and the second stop mode is different from the first stop mode (first stop mode). As a display mode of (a plurality of symbols), at least a first display mode that triggers execution of a predetermined special game, a second display mode that triggers execution of another special game different from the special game, and a special game And a third display mode that does not become an execution opportunity. Then, when the display mode of the identification information (plural symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by the stop of the variable display is the first display mode, the variable displays of the multiple symbols are displayed in the first stop order ( In the case of the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display of a plurality of symbols is stopped in the second stop order (second stop mode). Is possible. For this reason, the player can estimate the type of special game that can be executed, whether or not it is executed, and the possibility, etc., through the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop mode when the change display of the identification information stops and to give a sense of expectation for the subsequent special game.

The gaming machine of reference invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-2 described above,
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, it further has a fourth display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game,
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, it further has a third stop mode in which the stop timings of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same,
The fluctuation display means includes
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the fourth display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode or the third stop mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a display mode of the identification information (plural symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display of the identification information (plural symbols), the execution of the special game is further performed. In the case where the display mode of the identification information (plural symbols) that has the fourth display mode that is not triggered and is displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped is the fourth display mode, In the second stop mode or the third stop mode in which the stop timings (stop timings) of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same, the variable display of the plurality of symbols can be stopped. For this reason, the mode (third stop mode) that can immediately recognize that there is no possibility of executing the special game is included in the stop mode of the variable display when the display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game is derived and displayed. Is possible. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the execution of the special game while diversifying the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped.

The gaming machine of reference invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-2 or reference invention 1-3 described above,
When the variation display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, a predetermined effect display is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display of identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, that is, the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode. In this case, a predetermined effect display is executed in accordance with this. For this reason, the identification information may be displayed (derived display) in the first display mode, that is, the player may be shown with an emphasis on the execution of the special game triggered by the display of the first display mode. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect when the variation display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 1-2 to Reference Invention 1-4 described above,
Equipped with a state control means capable of controlling the gaming state when the variation display of identification information is performed
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The second gaming state is characterized in that, compared to the first gaming state, the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is more frequently the first display mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state are provided as the gaming state when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. Compared to the above, the display mode of the identification information displayed by the stoppage of the variable display is frequently changed to the first display mode. That is, in the second game state, the execution frequency of the special game (predetermined special game) that is triggered by the display of the first display mode is higher than that in the first display mode. For this reason, in the 2nd game state, the frequency that the change display of identification information stops in the 1st stop mode becomes high. Thus, in the second gaming state, the player is focused on whether or not the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, and the expectation for the special game triggered by the display in the first display mode is obtained. It becomes possible to talk.

The gaming machine of reference invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-5 described above.
As the types of symbols constituting the identification information, at least the first symbol type and the second symbol type,
The first display mode is composed of symbols of the second symbol type among the first symbol type and the second symbol type,
At least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is set as the second symbol type in the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, at least the first symbol type and the second symbol type are included as the symbol types constituting the identification information, and among these first symbol type and second symbol type, The first display mode is configured by the symbols of the second symbol type, and at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is set as the second symbol type in the second gaming state. It has become a thing. For this reason, in the 1st game state, since it is a symbol of the 1st symbol type, the symbol which cannot constitute the 1st display mode changes into the symbol which can constitute the 1st display mode by becoming the 2nd gaming state. Will be. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player pay attention not only to the stop mode when the variable display of identification information stops but also to the symbol type.

  According to the above reference invention 1, regarding the display of identification information, it is possible to realize a display of a new aspect that attracts the player's interest, and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 2)
Conventionally, when the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable entrance (for example, the big prize entrance), and the game ball enters the variable entrance Based on the above, there is known a gaming machine in which a predetermined gaming profit (for example, a prize ball) is given to a player. In this type of gaming machine, the amount of game profit that is given in response to the entry of the game ball into the variable entrance, that is, the amount of game profit that the player will acquire (acquired profit amount) is predetermined. Is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664).

  However, the display of the earned profit amount as described above has already been adopted by many gaming machines, resulting in a lack of freshness. This reference invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to realize a new aspect of production as an effect of displaying the amount of earned profit, and to improve gaming entertainment. .

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball cannot enter and a state in which it can enter,
Profit granting means capable of giving a predetermined game profit based on the entrance to the variable entrance,
Profit presentation execution means capable of executing a profit presentation that displays the amount of profit earned when a gaming profit is given by the profit granting means;
A state control means capable of controlling the gaming state,
The state control means is capable of controlling a gaming state to a specific gaming state based on establishment of a control condition,
The profit effect executing means includes at least a first profit effect for adding and displaying the acquired profit amount based on the entrance to the variable entrance in the specific game state, and the specific period in the specific game state. It is possible to execute a second profit effect that adds and displays the amount of earned profit based on the entrance to the variable entrance.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a game ball enters a variable entrance when controlled to a specific game state, and a predetermined game profit is given to the player accordingly, As an effect (profit effect) for displaying the amount of game profit to be given (acquired profit amount), at least two kinds of effects, a first profit effect and a second profit effect, can be executed. Is executed during a specific period in a specific gaming state. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest to the profit effect executed based on the entrance to the variable entrance in the specific gaming state, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-1 described above.
The profit effect execution means can execute the first profit effect on a predetermined first display unit without executing the second profit effect in a period other than the specific period, and the first profit in the specific period. The second profit effect can be executed on the predetermined second display unit without executing the effect,
After the end of the specific period, an effect of adding and displaying the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit by the second profit effect in the specific period to the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit. It is characterized by being executable.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the specific gaming state, in a period other than the specific period, the first profit effect is executed on the first display unit based on the entrance to the variable entrance, and in the specific period, The second profit effect is executed on the second display unit based on the entrance to the variable entrance. Further, when the specific period ends, the first profit effect is performed on the acquired profit amount (the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit) added and displayed by the second profit effect executed in the specific period. An effect of adding (displaying) the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit is executed. Thereby, it is possible to increase the effect effect of the profit effect by changing the display mode of the acquired profit amount in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-1 or reference invention 2-2 described above.
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of the acquisition condition;
An identification information display means capable of performing a variable display of the identification information based on the acquired information;
Pre-determining means capable of performing pre-determination as to whether or not the acquired information is specific acquired information before the execution of the variable display,
Based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, it is possible to enter the variable entrance.
The specific acquisition information is acquisition information for deriving the specific display result as a display result of the variable display,
The specific period is a period that can be started when a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit as a result of the preliminary determination in the specific gaming state. It is what.

  According to such a gaming machine, the acquired information acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition can be stored, and the variable display of the identification information can be executed based on the acquired information. Prior to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to determine in advance whether the acquired information is the specific acquired information. If the acquired information is the specific acquired information, the variable display based on the specific acquired information is displayed. As a result, a specific display result is derived, and using this as a trigger, it is possible to enter the variable entrance. The specific period in the specific game state is a period that can be started in a situation where a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored. That is, it is a period that can be started in a situation in which it is determined that it is possible to enter the variable entrance with a predetermined number of pieces of specific acquisition information. Thereby, during the specific gaming state, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the second profit effect accompanying the start of the specific period, and to increase the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 described above,
The specific period ends after it is possible to enter the variable entrance with the specific acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means at the start of the specific period. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific display result is derived through the execution of the variable display based on the specific acquisition information stored at the start of the specific period, and based on this, the entry to the variable entrance After the period becomes available, the specific period ends. Thereby, it is possible to increase the certainty that the second profit effect is executed during the specific period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 or Reference Invention 2-4 described above.
The pre-determination means can execute the pre-determination during the specific period,
The specific period is extended based on a new determination result indicating that the information is specific acquisition information by the prior determination during the specific period.

  According to such a gaming machine, prior determination can be performed even during a specific period, and prior determination is performed for acquired information newly acquired during the specific period, and the acquired information is specific acquired information. When the determination result is obtained, the specific period is extended. Thereby, since the period during which the second profit effect is executed is extended, the effect effect of the profit effect can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 2-3 to Reference Invention 2-5 described above.
In the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect based on the determination result that the specific acquisition information is obtained by the prior determination,
When the predetermined effect is executed, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed is different depending on the number of specific acquisition information stored at that time.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific gaming state, the predetermined effect can be executed based on the result of the prior determination that the acquired information is the specific acquired information. The effect mode differs depending on the number of stored specific acquisition information when the predetermined effect is executed. As a result, during the specific game state, it is possible to achieve the effect effect by the profit effect and the predetermined effect, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the specific game state.

  According to the reference invention 2 described above, it is possible to realize a new aspect of the effect as an effect of displaying the acquired profit amount, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Reference invention 3)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine that performs a variable display of identification information and can execute a special game based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, there is one configured so that any one of a plurality of effect modes can be selected by a manual input operation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). As the time when the effect mode can be selected, for example, it can be set at various times, such as during the display of variation of the identification information, during the display of the standby screen (demo screen), during the special game (for example, during the big hit game). Is possible. In addition, in the configuration in which the effect mode can be selected during the special game, the effect mode after the special game is selected (see, for example, JP-A-2006-17495).

  However, in the conventional configuration in which the effect mode after the special game can be selected during the special game, the generation mode of the selectable time and the notification mode indicating the generation are uniform, and there is a problem that the freshness is lacking. there were. This reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to select a presentation mode after a special game in a novel manner, and to improve the game entertainment. .

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball cannot enter and a state in which it can enter,
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being a specific display result,
The special game is composed of a predetermined number of round games,
A gaming machine configured to enable entry into the variable entrance in the round game,
As a production mode when the variation display of the identification information is performed, it has a plurality of production modes,
A selection period generating means capable of generating a selection period in which a presentation mode after the special game is ended can be selected from the plurality of presentation modes at a predetermined time after the start of the special game;
A first notification means for performing a notification before the start of the selection period in the round game before the predetermined round game when the selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the special game. To do.

  According to such a gaming machine, at a predetermined time after the special game is started, it is possible to generate a selection period in which the effect mode after the special game is ended can be selected from a plurality of effect modes. When the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the special game, notification before the selection period starts is performed in the round game before the predetermined round game. For this reason, it is possible to select a production mode in a predetermined round game during a special game (a selection period occurs), and in advance notice in a round game before that, It is possible to select a production mode in a novel manner, such as the occurrence (start). As a result, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the selection of the effect mode after the special game, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In the selection of the effect mode in the selection period, for example, a manual selection in which a player selects and inputs one of a plurality of effect modes using a predetermined input unit provided in the gaming machine, or a plurality of effect modes can be selected. Automatic selection in which any one is automatically selected is included.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-1 described above.
Second notification means for performing notification during the selection period in the predetermined round game when the selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the special game;
When the predetermined round game ends and the next round game starts, third notification means for performing notification before the end of the selection period,
The selection period ends during the round game in which the notification by the third notification means is performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a selection period of the production mode occurs in a predetermined round game, the predetermined round game is notified during the selection period, and then the predetermined round game ends and the next round game Is started, in the round game (the round game next to the predetermined round game), a notification is made before the selection period ends. The selection period ends during the round game in which the notification is made before the selection period ends (during the next round game after the predetermined round game). For this reason, when the selection period of the production mode occurs in a predetermined round game, notification (notification by the first notification means) before the selection period performed in the round game before the predetermined round game, and the predetermined The special game is performed by notification during the selection period (notification by the second notification means) performed in the round game and notification before the end of the selection period (notification by the third notification means) performed in the next round game of the predetermined round game. It becomes possible to prompt the player to select a later production mode. In this way, by adopting a new notification mode in which the player is prompted to select a production mode after a special game over a plurality of round games, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the production mode selection. . In addition, the selection period of the production mode is from the start of the predetermined round game to the middle of the next round game, and the above-mentioned notification is performed from the start to the end of the selection period, so that the player can select the production mode. It becomes possible not to miss the opportunity of selecting the production mode without noticing the occurrence of the period.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-1 or reference invention 3-2 described above.
Equipped with a state control means capable of controlling the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed,
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
When the special game is executed when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the first gaming state, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the second gaming state. The generation period of the selection period differs depending on whether the special game is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the special game is executed when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the first game state, and the second game is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The generation time of the production mode selection period differs depending on the state in which the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the state and the special game is executed. As a result, it is possible to select a production mode in a new mode, such as making the subsequent presentation mode selectable time different depending on the gaming state when the specific display result is derived, and to prevent the production mode selection from becoming monotonous. Is possible.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-3 described above.
When the special game is executed when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result in the first game state, the selection period occurs after all of the round games constituting the special game are completed. An announcement will be made during the selected period,
When the special game is executed when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result in the second game state, the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the special game. Is.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a special game is executed when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the first gaming state, all of the round games constituting the special game are finished. Later, a selection period of the production mode occurs, and notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the special game is executed when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the predetermined round game in the special game is executed. In this case, a notification period by the first notification means (notification before the start of the selection period), a notification by the second notification means (notification during the selection period), and a second notification mode are generated. 3 Notification (notification before the end of the selection period) is performed by the notification unit. For this reason, when the specific display result is derived in the first game state and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the production mode after the end of all the round games, and the game state is changed to the second game state. When the specific display result is derived and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the production mode before all the round games are completed. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the mode of effect mode selection depending on whether the gaming state when the specific display result is derived is the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and the player has a different impression. Can be given.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-4 described above,
The special game has a plurality of types of special games,
The generation period of the selection period differs depending on the type of special game to be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the generation period of the effect mode selection period differs depending on the type of special game executed based on the display result of the variable display being the specific display result. As a result, it is possible to select an effect mode in a novel manner in which the effect mode selectable time varies depending on the type of special game to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-5 described above.
As the plurality of types of special games, at least a first special game and a second special game having a larger number of round games than the first special game,
When the first special game is executed, the selection period is generated after all the round games constituting the first special game are finished, and notification during the selection period is performed,
When the second special game is executed, the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, When the first special game is executed with a relatively small number of round games constituting the special game, After all of the round games constituting the first special game are finished, a selection period of the production mode occurs, Notification is performed during the selection period. On the other hand When the second special game with a relatively large number of round games constituting the special game is executed, In the predetermined round game during the second special game, the selection period of the production mode occurs. in this case, Notification by the first notification means described above (notification before the start of the selection period), Notification by the second notification means (notification during the selection period) and notification by the third notification means (notification before the end of the selection period) are performed. For this reason, When the first special game (special game with a relatively small number of round games) is executed, The player will be given the opportunity to select a production mode after the end of all round games. When the second special game (special game with a relatively large number of round games) is executed, The player is given an opportunity to select a production mode before all round games are completed. This When the first special game is executed and when the second special game is executed, It becomes possible to change the mode of production mode selection, It is possible to give a different impression to the player.

  According to the above reference invention 3, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by selecting the production mode after the special game in a novel manner.

(Reference invention 4)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), the second start port is a variable start port, and the entrance frequency is lowered in the low base state and the entrance frequency is increased in the high base state. In the low base state, there is a game aiming at the first start port, and in the high base state, there is a game aiming at the second start port. In addition, there has been a gaming machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which a game is aimed at the right area of the game area when a big hit game or a high base state is reached. In such a gaming machine, a left-handed game is played in the low base state, and once the advantageous state is reached, the right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is difficult to say that various entrances are simply arranged in the right-handed area, and that an efficient game can proceed. In view of the above-mentioned circumstances, unlike conventional gaming machines, by arranging various entrances at predetermined positions in a predetermined game area, it is possible to diversify the game and increase the game efficiency. In addition, a gaming machine that enhances the gaming interest is provided.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
A specific start opening where game balls can enter,
A variable start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
Specific identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the specific start opening;
Identification information for variably displaying based on the ball entering the variable start port;
When the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the variable start port is in the second state;
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, special game executing means for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible;
A specific start port, a first variable entrance, a variable start entrance, and a second variable entrance from the upstream of the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific start port, the first variable entrance port, the variable start port, and the second variable entrance port are provided at predetermined locations in the game area, and these are provided upstream of the game area. The specific start port, the first variable entrance port, the variable start port, and the second variable entrance port are arranged in this order from the downstream. Thereby, the progress of an efficient game is enabled.

  Specifically, in order to smoothly advance the game, it is necessary to first set the variable start port related to the execution of the special game to the second state (open state). Place at the top of the ball opening. Thereby, first, the possibility that the variable start port is set to the second state (open state) is increased. In addition, since the game ball that has entered (passed through) the specific starting port is a gate type (gate 28) that flows down the game area thereafter, the subsequent game proceeds smoothly. In addition, since the first variable entrance is arranged downstream of the specific start entrance, the entrance when the special game is executed can be quickly performed, and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time. In addition, by providing the first variable entry opening upstream of the variable start opening, the game ball enters the variable start opening that is in the second state during the special game, and the first variable entry opening is connected to the first variable entry opening. It is also possible to prevent a situation where entry is hindered.

  In addition, by arranging the variable start opening downstream of the first variable entry opening, the variable start opening in the second state is provided except for the case where the first variable entry opening is ready for entry in a special game. It is possible to enter the game balls that flow down prior to other entrances. As a result, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the ball does not enter the variable start port even though the variable start port is in the second state. In addition, by placing the second variable entrance into the downstream of the variable start entrance, the game ball enters the second variable entrance based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable start entrance. The frequency will change, and it will be possible to add a variety of games. Thereby, it is possible to diversify game play while providing smooth game progress.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-1,
As the special mode, it has a first special mode and a second special mode,
As the special game, there are a first special game and a second special game,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed,
The first special game has more game profits that can be obtained than the second special game.
The first variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special mode and the second special mode are provided as the special information game stop display mode, and the first special game and the second special mode are displayed. 2 special games. Then, the first special game is a special game with more game profits that can be obtained than the second special game. In the first special game, the first variable entrance is set in a state in which it can enter (open state), and the second special game. Then, the 2nd variable entrance is made into a state in which entrance is possible.

  Specifically, first, in order to set the variable start port to the second state (open state), the specific start port according to this is arranged at the most upstream of these entrances. Next, by arranging the first variable entrance at the downstream of the specific start entrance, the entrance when the first special game with a large game profit amount is executed is made quick, and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time. Allows acquisition. Next, the variable start port is arranged downstream of the first variable entry port, so that the variable state of the second state is variable except when the first variable entry port is ready for entry in a special game. It is possible to cause the game ball flowing down to enter the starting port with priority over other entrances. In addition, the second variable entrance that is in a state in which it is possible to enter in the second special game with a small amount of game profit can be arranged downstream of the variable start port, and various games can be added. Thereby, it is possible to diversify game play while providing smooth game progress.

In addition, as a 1st special aspect and a 2nd special aspect, a different stop symbol can be illustrated, for example. In addition, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, special games having different execution modes (number of rounds, opening time, obtainable profit, and variable entrance to be opened) can be exemplified.

The gaming machine of reference invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-2.
A first game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a higher frequency than the first game state. It has a game state setting means that can be set,
In the second gaming state, a game ball is made to enter the variable start port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side of the variable start port. By making entry difficult,
When the second special game occurs, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is higher in the first game state than in the second game state. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first gaming state in which the frequency of entering a game ball into the variable start port is low and a second gaming state in which the pitching frequency is higher than the first gaming state. Since the variable start port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in a state in which it is possible to enter (open state) in the second special game, the second variable entrance is more in the first game state than in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game, and enhance the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of reference invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-3.
The game profit obtained by entering the second variable entrance is more than the game profit obtained by entering the variable start entrance.

  According to such a gaming machine, a gaming profit (for example, a prize ball given when one gaming ball enters) that can be acquired by entering a gaming ball is more than the variable starting port. Increase the number of variable entrances. As described above, when the second special game occurs, in the first game state in which the variable start port is unlikely to be in the second state, the game ball that has flowed down can easily enter the second variable ball entrance on the downstream side. In the second game state in which the variable start port is likely to be in the second state, it is easy to enter the upstream variable start port. As a result, the player expects to enter the second variable entrance where the game profit that can be obtained is greater than the variable start entrance, and expects the second special game to occur in the first gaming state. , Enhance the entertainment interest. In addition, this makes it possible to differentiate the game profits that can be obtained when the same second special game is generated in the first game state and the second game state, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game interest. It becomes.

The gaming machine of reference invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-4.
The gaming state does not change based on the execution of the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state is not changed by the execution of the second special game, that is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, if the second special game can be executed in the first gaming state, the first gaming state continues after the second special game is executed in the first gaming state. By generating a game, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 to Reference Invention 4-5,
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-6
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first start opening,
The first identification information and the identification information can be variably displayed in parallel.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information that is variably displayed based on the entrance to the first start opening and the identification information that is variably displayed based on the entrance to the variable start opening are concurrently provided. Fluctuation display is possible (at the same time). As a result, in the simultaneous variable gaming machine (simultaneous variable machine) that can display the first identification information and the identification information in parallel (simultaneously), the game can be diversified while providing smooth progress of the game. To do.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics and improve the gaming interests while allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

(Reference invention 5)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), there are a plurality of gaming states as the gaming state, and from the normal state to the probable change state or the time-saving state advantageous to the player when the big hit game is executed. It has become a transitional gaming machine. Further, in the advantageous state, when the next big hit game does not occur while the symbols are displayed in a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is terminated and the normal state is restored. Such gaming machines have exhibited certain effects such as preventing the game from getting bored by the transition of the gaming state.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 and the conventional gaming machine, the transition state of the gaming state and the gaming state after the transition are uniform, and the gaming interest has not been enhanced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that diversifies gaming characteristics and enhances gaming fun by giving a characteristic to a game state transition mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first start opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a higher frequency than the first game state. Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter Game execution means;
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
The identification result has a first identification result,
When the first specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, and the probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Then, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, in the high probability and the second gaming state, the number of times of the variable display between the first identification information and the second identification information is When the specific number of times is reached, the gaming state changes from a high probability and the second gaming state to a high probability and the first gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of reference invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 5-1,
As the specific result, it has a second specific result,
When the second specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
A case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and a case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of the variable display becomes a specific number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) between the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether the second game state has a predetermined probability and the second game state has a high probability. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the game entertainment. In addition, this allows the player to expect that the gaming state will change to the second gaming state with a high probability when the specific number of times has elapsed during execution of the common performance, and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest. .

The gaming machine of reference invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 5-1 or reference invention 5-2.
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the higher probability and the first gaming state have a higher gaming probability that can be obtained than the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability as the specific number of times elapses, and enhances the gaming interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 5-1 to reference invention 5-3.
Providing the second start opening upstream of the game area, providing the second variable entrance opening downstream of the second start opening,
In the second game state with a high probability, the second ball disposed at the downstream side of the second starting port is caused to enter the second starting port disposed at the upstream side of the gaming area. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is set to the second probability. The first game state is higher in probability and higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second start opening is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second start opening. And since the 2nd starting port arrange | positioned in an upstream side will be in a 2nd state (open state), the entrance of the game ball to the 2nd variable entrance port arrange | positioned in the downstream is made difficult. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are more likely than the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game, and enhance the game entertainment.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4.
As the special game, there are a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game is capable of changing a gaming state after the first special game is finished,
The second special game shall not change the gaming state after the second special game ends,
The first variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is ready to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, it is assumed that the second special game in which the second variable entrance is ready to enter does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first gaming state with a high probability is reached, the first gaming state continues with a high probability after the execution of the second special game in the first gaming state with a high probability. By generating it, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 5, it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first start opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a higher frequency than the first game state. Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter Game execution means;
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result;
A launcher that launches a game ball into a game area with a predetermined launch intensity,
The first start port is provided in a first game area where a game ball launched at a first launch intensity can enter,
The second start port is provided in a second game area in which a game ball launched at a second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity can enter,
The identification result has a first identification result,
When the first specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
As a result of the change display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first start opening, the first identification result is not included,
The first identification result is provided as a result of the change display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, and the probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. In addition, the first start opening is provided in a first game area where a ball can be entered with a first launch strength, and the second start opening is provided in a second game area where a ball can be entered with a second launch intensity. . When the first specific result is reached, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a high probability and the second gaming state, in the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of times of the variable display becomes a specific number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the game entertainment. Moreover, the first identification result is not included as a result of the variable display of the first identification information, and the first identification result is included as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. As a result, it is possible to provide different game characteristics when the game ball is inserted into the first start port and when the game ball is input into the second start port, diversify the game characteristics, It becomes possible to raise.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 6-1,
As the specific result, it has a second specific result,
When the second specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
A case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and a case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state,
The second identification result is included as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is obtained as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the number of times of the variable display between the first identification information and the second identification information in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state is When the specific number of times is reached, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a predetermined probability to the first gaming state with a predetermined probability. Further, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) between the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether the second game state has a predetermined probability and the second game state has a high probability. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the game entertainment. This also enables the player to expect a gaming state to change to the first gaming state with a high probability when the specific number of times has elapsed during execution of a common performance, and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest. .

The gaming machine of reference invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 6-1 or reference invention 6-2.
As the specific result, it has a third specific result,
When the third specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the first gaming state, and the gaming state does not change until the next specific result is reached in the gaming state. And
The third identification result is provided as a result of the change display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is obtained as a result of the variable display of the first identification information. If the gaming state after the end of the special game with the third specific result is set to the first gaming state with a high probability, the gaming state is maintained with the high probability and the first gaming state until the next specific result is reached. I am going to do it. Thereby, as a result of the variation display of the first identification information, there is no change from the second gaming state to the first gaming state with a high probability based on the variation display of the specific number of times, and the special game ends. From the later, until the next specific result is obtained, it has a high probability and guarantees the gaming state of the first gaming state. This also makes it possible to play a game with a sense of security in a game accompanied by a variable display of the first identification information, diversify the game, and enhance the gaming interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3,
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the higher probability and the first gaming state have a higher gaming probability that can be obtained than the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability as the specific number of times elapses, and enhances the gaming interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-4,
Providing the second start opening upstream of the second game area, providing the second variable entrance opening downstream of the second start opening,
In the second game state with a high probability, the second ball disposed at the downstream side of the second starting port is caused to enter the second starting port disposed at the upstream side of the gaming area. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is set to the second probability. The first game state is higher in probability and higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second start port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second start port. And since the 2nd starting port arrange | positioned in an upstream side will be in a 2nd state (open state), the entrance of the game ball to the 2nd variable entrance port arrange | positioned in the downstream is made difficult. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are more likely than the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game, and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-5,
As the special game, there are a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game is capable of changing a gaming state after the first special game is finished,
The second special game shall not change the gaming state after the second special game ends,
The first variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is ready to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, it is assumed that the second special game in which the second variable entrance is ready to enter does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first gaming state with a high probability is reached, the first gaming state continues with a high probability after the execution of the second special game in the first gaming state with a high probability. By generating it, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 6, it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 7)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first start opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a higher frequency than the first game state. Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter Game execution means;
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
As the specific result, it has a first specific result and a fourth specific result,
When the first specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display becomes the first number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
When the fourth specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display is the second number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, and the probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. And when it becomes the 1st specific result and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, in the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of times of the variable display becomes the first number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state. If the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state as the fourth specific result, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of the variable display becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the change timing of the gaming state and maintain the gaming interest for a long time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the gaming interest.

  In this aspect, when the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information is the first number or the second number, the gaming state is high probability and the second gaming state is high probability and the second number. It was assumed that it changed to 1 gaming state. As another aspect, when the number of times of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the first number or the second number regardless of the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information, the gaming state has a high probability and the second game state. It is good also as what changes to a 1st gaming state with high probability. As another aspect, when the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information becomes the first number or the second number regardless of the number of times of the variable display of the second identification information, the game state is highly probable and the second game It is good also as what changes from a state to a 1st gaming state with high probability.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-1,
As the specific result, it has a second specific result and a fifth specific result,
When the second specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability,
When the fifth specified result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display reaches the second number, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability,
A case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and a case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, if the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state as the second specifying result, the first probability is set to the first gaming state. When the number of variable displays of the identification information and the second identification information is the first number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state as the fifth identification result, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of the variable display becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) between the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether the second game state has a predetermined probability and the second game state has a high probability. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the change timing of the gaming state and maintain the gaming interest for a long time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the gaming interest. This also allows the player to expect that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability when the first number of times and the second number of times have elapsed during execution of the common performance, It is possible to enhance the entertainment interest.

The gaming machine of reference invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-2.
The second number is greater than the first number;
It is more likely that the gaming state changes to the first probability and the gaming state when the gaming state changes at the second number of times than when the gaming state changes at the first number of times. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is greater than the first number of times, and the gaming state is higher at the second number of times than when the gaming state change timing is the first number of times. The probability and the possibility of changing to the first gaming state are high. Thus, when the player reaches the first number of times, the player plays the game with the expectation that the gaming state is maintained without change, and the game state reaches the second number of times while remaining in the second gaming state. At that time, the game is played with a high probability of changing to the first gaming state with a high probability. Thereby, in the 2nd game state, it has a point which raises a sense of expectation in multiple times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of reference invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-2.
The second number is greater than the first number;
It is more likely that the gaming state changes to the first probability and the gaming state when the gaming state changes at the first number of times than when the gaming state changes at the second number of times. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number is set to be higher than the first number, and the gaming state is higher at the first number than when the gaming state change timing is the second number. The probability and the possibility of changing to the first gaming state are high. This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that the gaming state will change when the first number of times is reached, and when the player reaches the second number of times while the gaming state remains in the second gaming state. Although the sex is lower than that at the first number of times, the game is played with a high probability and expecting to change to the first gaming state. Thereby, in the 2nd game state, it has a point which raises a sense of expectation in multiple times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the gaming interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4.
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the higher probability and the first gaming state have a higher gaming probability that can be obtained than the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability as the specific number of times elapses, and enhances the gaming interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-5,
Providing the second start opening upstream of the game area, providing the second variable entrance opening downstream of the second start opening,
In the second game state with a high probability, the second ball disposed at the downstream side of the second starting port is caused to enter the second starting port disposed at the upstream side of the gaming area. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is set to the second probability. The first game state is higher in probability and higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second start opening is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second start opening. And since the 2nd starting port arrange | positioned in an upstream side will be in a 2nd state (open state), the entrance of the game ball to the 2nd variable entrance port arrange | positioned in the downstream is made difficult. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are more likely than the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game, and enhance the game entertainment.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4,
As the special game, there are a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game is capable of changing a gaming state after the first special game is finished,
The second special game shall not change the gaming state after the second special game ends,
The first variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is ready to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, it is assumed that the second special game in which the second variable entrance is ready to enter does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first gaming state with a high probability is reached, the first gaming state continues with a high probability after the execution of the second special game in the first gaming state with a high probability. By generating it, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 7, it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 8)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first start opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a higher frequency than the first game state. Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter Game execution means;
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result;
A first condition state in which the time for the variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a first condition; a second condition state in which the time for the variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a second condition; A second identification information change time determining means capable of setting
The second condition state is shorter than the first condition state, and the average time of the variable display time of the second identification information determined is shorter.
As the gaming state, the predetermined probability and the first gaming state and the first condition state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability, the first gaming state and the first state It has two condition states, the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability, the first condition state and the first condition state 2nd identification information variation time determination means capable of setting a second condition state in which the average time of the variation display time of the two identification information is shorter than the first condition state. In addition, the gaming state includes a predetermined probability, the first gaming state and the first condition state, a predetermined probability, the second gaming state and the second condition state, a high probability, the first gaming state and the second condition state, and a high probability. And in the gaming state in which the first condition state is set, the variable identification time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition is set to the second condition. In the gaming state in which the state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and enhance the gaming interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 8-1,
The case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is the specific result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case where the result of the variable display of the first identification information is the specific result. It is characterized by.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that there is a higher possibility that the player is more advantageous than the first identification information when the variation display result of the second identification information is the specific result. For example, it is possible to increase the gaming profit obtained by special games executed as specific results, increase the possibility of increase, or increase the possibility of becoming advantageous after the special game ends. is there. Thereby, the player expects that the state in which the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in a large amount, that is, the second condition state in which the time of the variable display of the second identification information is relatively short is set. Will play a game. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, so that the gaming state can be diversified, the gaming property can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 8-1 or reference invention 8-2.
It has a 3rd starting port where game balls can enter,
The second identification information is variably displayed based on the ball entering the third starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the third start port on which the second identification information is variably displayed based on the entry of the game ball is provided. As a result, the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner by entering any one of the variable second start opening and the third start opening, and it is possible to enhance the game fun.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 8-1 or reference invention 8-2.
Equipped with a launching device for launching a game ball into a game area with a predetermined launch intensity;
The first start port is provided in a first game area where a game ball launched at a first launch intensity can enter,
The second start opening, the first variable entry opening, and the second variable entry opening are second games in which game balls launched at the second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity can enter. Provided in the area,
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability, the first gaming state, and the first condition state, a game ball is launched in the first gaming area, and the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game. ,
The gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the second In the two-condition state, the game is played with the second identification information variably displayed by firing a game ball in the second game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first start opening is provided in the first game area where the first launch strength can be entered, and the second start opening, the first variable entrance, and the second variable entrance are , Provided in the second game area that can enter the ball with the second launch strength. When the game state is a predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, a game ball is launched in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. When the gaming state is a predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, a high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or a high probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, It is assumed that a game is played by firing a game ball in the second game area and variably displaying the second identification information. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. In the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. The game is performed by firing and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

  Thereby, it is possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and enhance the gaming interest. In addition, when the variation display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the game is played in the expectation that the second condition state in which the second identification information is variably displayed is set. Become. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, so that the gaming state can be diversified, the gaming property can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 8-5 is the gaming machine of reference invention 8-3.
Equipped with a launching device for launching a game ball into the game area with a predetermined launch intensity;
The first start port is provided in a first game area where a game ball launched at a first launch intensity can enter,
The second starting port, the third starting port, the first variable entrance port, and the second variable entrance port are filled with game balls launched at a second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity. In a possible second gaming area,
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability, the first gaming state, and the first condition state, a game ball is launched in the first gaming area, and the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game. ,
The gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the second In the two-condition state, the game is played with the second identification information variably displayed by firing a game ball in the second game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first start opening is provided in the first game area where the first launch strength can be entered, and the second start opening, the third start opening, the first variable entry opening, and the second The variable entrance is provided in the second game area where the entrance can be made with the second launch strength. When the game state is a predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, a game ball is launched in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. When the gaming state is a predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, a high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or a high probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, It is assumed that a game is played by firing a game ball in the second game area and variably displaying the second identification information. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. In the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. The game is performed by firing and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

  Thereby, it is possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and enhance the gaming interest. In addition, when the variation display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the game is played in the expectation that the second condition state in which the second identification information is variably displayed is set. Become. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, so that the gaming state can be diversified, the gaming property can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-5,
The high probability, the first gaming state, and the second condition state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state having a higher probability, the first game state, and the second condition state has higher game profits that can be obtained than the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state. Yes. Thereby, the player progresses the game in anticipation that the gaming state is set to the first gaming state and the second condition state with high probability, and enhances the gaming interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-6,
Providing the second start opening upstream of the second game area, providing the second variable entrance opening downstream of the second start opening,
In the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state, a game ball is made to enter the second start port disposed on the upstream side of the second game area, and more than the second start port. By making it difficult to enter the second variable entry port disposed on the downstream side, it is possible to increase the probability of entering the game ball into the second variable entry port with the high probability. It is characterized in that the high probability, the first gaming state and the second condition state are higher than the state and the second condition state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second start port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second start port. And since the 2nd starting port arrange | positioned in an upstream side will be in a 2nd state (open state), the entrance of the game ball to the 2nd variable entrance port arrange | positioned in the downstream is made difficult. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball (open state) in the second special game, the first game state and the second condition state have a higher probability and the second condition. It is assumed that the frequency of entering game balls into the second variable entrance is higher than in the game state and the second condition state. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game, and enhance the game entertainment.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 8, it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 9)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first start opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a higher frequency than the first game state. Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter Game execution means;
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
The gaming state includes the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, and the high probability and the second gaming state. And
The second variable entrance is characterized in that when the gaming state becomes the high probability and the first gaming state, the entering frequency of the gaming ball increases.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, and the probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Further, the gaming state has a predetermined probability and a first gaming state, a predetermined probability and a second gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, and a high probability and a second gaming state, of which It is assumed that the frequency of entering the second variable entrance becomes high when the first gaming state has a high probability. Thereby, the player progresses the game with high probability and expecting the occurrence of the first gaming state. This also makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and enhance the gaming interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of the reference invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of the reference invention 9-1.
Equipped with a launching device for launching a game ball into the game area with a predetermined launch intensity;
The first start port is provided in a first game area where a game ball launched at a first launch intensity can enter,
The second start opening, the first variable entrance, and the second variable entrance are second game areas in which game balls launched at a second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity can enter. Provided in
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, a game ball is launched into the first gaming area, and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game.
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, or the high probability and the second gaming state, a game ball is launched into the second gaming area. Thus, a gaming machine that performs a game by variably displaying the second identification information,
In a gaming state in which a game ball is displayed by variably displaying the second identification information by launching a game ball in the second game area,
The frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and the high probability and the first gaming state than the high probability and the second gaming state. Is characterized by being higher.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first start opening is provided in the first game area where the first launch strength can be entered, and the second start opening, the first variable entrance, and the second variable entrance are , Provided in the second game area that can enter the ball with the second launch strength. When the gaming state is the first gaming state with a predetermined probability, a game ball is launched in the first gaming area and the first identification information is displayed in a variably displayed manner. Further, when the gaming state is a predetermined probability and the second gaming state, a high probability and the first gaming state, or a high probability and the second gaming state, the game ball is launched into the second gaming area and the second identification information is obtained. It is assumed that the game is played in a variable display. In addition, in a gaming state in which a game ball is launched into the second gaming area to play a game, that is, in a second state with a predetermined probability, a second state with a high probability, a first state with a high probability, and a second state with a high probability, The gaming state with the highest frequency of entering the game ball into the variable entrance is the first game state with high probability.

  As a result, when the player enters a gaming state in which a game ball is launched into the second gaming area to play a game, the game progresses with the expectation that the gaming state is the first gaming state with a high probability. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and enhance the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of reference invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 9-1 or reference invention 9-2.
Providing the second start opening upstream of the second game area, providing the second variable entrance opening downstream of the second start opening,
In the second game state with a high probability, the second ball disposed at the downstream side of the second starting port is caused to enter the second starting port disposed at the upstream side of the gaming area. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is set to the second probability. The first game state is higher in probability and higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second start port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second start port. And since the 2nd starting port arrange | positioned in an upstream side will be in a 2nd state (open state), the entrance of the game ball to the 2nd variable entrance port arrange | positioned in the downstream is made difficult. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are more likely than the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game, and enhance the game entertainment.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 9, it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 10)
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that can execute a special game that can give a predetermined profit to a player when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. Widely known. In this type of gaming machine, the game entertainment is improved by performing various effects to increase the player's expectation during the variation display of the identification information. As such effects, for example, information related to the fluctuation display of the identification information currently being executed, the fluctuation display of the identification information executed thereafter, and the like (for example, the expectation level (reliability) that the display result becomes the specific display result, the display There is known an effect of displaying (notifying) a change (effect) until a result is derived (see, for example, JP-A-2002-239122).

  However, the effects performed during the variation display of the identification information as described above have already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the effect modes are also uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the gaming interest. The present invention 10 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to realize an effect capable of attracting the player's interest as an effect performed during the variable display of identification information. The purpose is to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of reference invention 10-1 for solving the above-described problems is
A variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information;
A state control means capable of controlling the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed;
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game that can be given a predetermined game profit based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being a specific display result;
An information display effect execution means capable of executing an information display effect for displaying information on the game after the end of the variable display during the variable information identification display;
The information includes at least first information, second information, and third information,
The first information indicates that a special game is executed after the end of the change display,
The second information indicates that the current gaming state is continued even after the end of the change display,
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes an unfavorable gaming state after the end of the variable display,
The information display effect executing means is capable of displaying at least two pieces of information among the first to third information at the start of the information display effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, when executing an information display effect that displays information related to the game after the end of the variation display during the variation display of the identification information, at the start of the information display effect, First information indicating that the special game is to be executed after the end, second information indicating that the current gaming state is continued even after the end of the variation display, and the gaming state after the end of the variation display It is possible to display at least two pieces of information among the third information indicating that the gaming state is disadvantageous. For this reason, when the information display effect is started during the variation display of the identification information, the player makes an alternative guess about the subsequent game development based on the type (content) of the information displayed at that time. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the information displayed at the start of the information display effect, and to improve the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of reference invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 10-1 described above.
The information display effect executing means may display the first information and the second information and may display the second information and the third information at the start of the information display effect. It is what.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the information display effect is started, there are a case where the first information and the second information are displayed and a case where the second information and the third information are displayed. For this reason, when the first information and the second information are displayed at the start of the information display effect, the player can estimate that there is no possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous. When the information and the third information are displayed, the possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous cannot be excluded. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that stirs the player's expectation and anxiety.

The gaming machine of reference invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 10-1 or reference invention 10-2 described above.
The special game has at least a first special game and a second special game,
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The second special game is a special game that has more game profits than the first special game.
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The state control means controls the gaming state after the end of the first special game to the first gaming state and controls the gaming state after the end of the second special game to the second gaming state. ,
The information display effect execution means can execute the information display effect in the second gaming state,
The first information indicates that the second special game is executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current second gaming state is continued even after the end of the change display,
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state after the end of the variation display.

  According to such a gaming machine, the special game has at least the first special game and the second special game, the game state has at least the first game state and the second game state, and the second special game. The game is a special game that has more game profits than the first special game, and the second game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Further, the gaming state after the first special game is ended becomes the first gaming state, and the gaming state after the second special game is ended becomes the second gaming state. The information display effect can be executed in the second game state (advantageous state). Among the information displayed in the information display effect, the first information indicates that the second special game is executed. The information indicates that the current second gaming state is continued even after the end of the variable display, and the third information indicates that the gaming state is the first gaming state. For this reason, information (game development) related to the game after the game in the second game state (displaying variation of identification information) is displayed by the information display effect. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the gaming interest of the second gaming state.

The gaming machine of reference invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 10-3 described above.
Fluctuation effect execution means capable of executing a variation effect during the variation display of the identification information,
The variation effect execution means can execute the variation effect based on a predetermined variation effect pattern,
As the variation effect pattern, at least a first variation effect pattern, a second variation effect pattern, and a third variation effect pattern,
When the second special game can be executed because the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern can be executed during the variation display,
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the first special game can be executed, and the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern can be executed during the variation display.
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information is a non-specific display result, a variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern can be executed during the variation display,
The information display effect executing means is
When the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is executed and when the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern is executed, the first information and the second information can be displayed.
When the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the second information and the third information can be displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the variation effect based on the predetermined variation effect pattern can be executed during the variation display of the identification information. As the variation effect pattern, at least the first variation effect pattern and the second variation effect are provided. A pattern and a third variation effect pattern. When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the second special game can be executed, and the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is displayed during the variation display. When the result becomes the specific display result, when the first special game can be executed, the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is displayed during the variation display, and the display result of the variation display of the identification information is the non-specific display result. In this case, it is possible to execute a variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern during the variation display. When the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is executed and the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern is executed during the variation display of the identification information, the information display in the variation display is performed. It is possible to display the first information and the second information at the start of the effect, and when the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the first information and the second information are displayed at the start of the information display effect in the variation display. 2 information and 3rd information can be displayed. For this reason, when the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the information display effect for displaying the first information and the second information is not performed. As a result, it is possible to match the information display effect executed during the variable display of the identification information with the variable effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-4 described above,
The information display effect execution means is capable of changing a display mode of information by the information display effect after the information display effect is started.

  According to such a gaming machine, after the information display effect is started during the variation display of the identification information, the information display mode by the information display effect can be changed. For this reason, when the information display effect is started during the variation display of the identification information, the player can recognize how the subsequent game development will be performed according to the display mode of the subsequent information. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the information display effect even after the start of the information display effect.

  According to the above reference invention 10, it is possible to realize an effect capable of attracting the player's interest as an effect performed during the variable display of the identification information, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 11)
Conventionally, a gaming machine that can display a variation of identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and can execute a special game that can give a predetermined gaming profit to a player when the display result of the variation display becomes a specific display result. Is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, it is common to perform various effects as the game progresses such as the display of variation of identification information and special games. In such a gaming machine, there is one that performs an effect (a reach effect or the like) indicating whether or not the display result of the variation display of the identification information is a specific display result as a character effect by a predetermined character (for example, JP (See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-154657).

  However, the configuration for performing character effects such as reach effects has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the execution mode is uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the gaming interest. The present invention 11 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and the object of the invention is to give a character effect to the execution aspect of the character effect, and to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine having the character effect. There is.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information;
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game that can be given a predetermined game profit based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being a specific display result;
A game machine equipped with an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The production execution means
As the effect, a character effect by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit can be executed,
It is characterized in that there are cases where a character effect is executed along with a variation display of identification information and a character effect is executed along with a special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are a case where the character effect by the character displayed on the predetermined display unit is executed along with the variation display of the identification information and a case where it is executed along with the special game. As a result, it is possible to provide a relevance to the effect accompanying the change display of the identification information and the effect accompanying the special game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of reference invention 11-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 11-1 described above,
Provided with a state control means capable of controlling the gaming state,
The state control means can control the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed to a specific gaming state,
When the specific gaming state is reached, a predetermined character is displayed on the predetermined display unit,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a character effect by a character displayed on the predetermined display unit in the specific gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed becomes the specific gaming state, a predetermined character is displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the character is displayed in the variation display of the identification information. There is a case where it is executed along with a special game and a case where it is executed along with a special game. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine of reference invention 11-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 11-1 or reference invention 11-2 described above.
As the specific display result, the first specific display result and the second specific display result,
As the special game, there are a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the first specific display result,
Based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being the second specific display result, the second special game can be executed,
The first special game has more game profits that can be given than the second special game.
The production execution means
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the variation display,
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game can be executed, a character effect is executed along with the second special game. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, and the first special game in which the gaming profit that can be given to the player is relatively large is executed. When possible, the character effect is executed in accordance with the variation display, and the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, and the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively small. When the assumed second special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the second special game. As a result, when the variable display of the identification information that causes the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) is performed, or when the second special game is performed, It becomes possible to raise.

The gaming machine of reference invention 11-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 11-3 described above.
A first variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball cannot enter and a state in which it can enter;
A second variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball cannot enter and a state in which it can enter,
In the first special game, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into the first variable entrance,
In the second special game, it is possible to enter a game ball into the second variable entrance,
In the specific game state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance accompanying the second special game is higher than in game states other than the specific game state,
The production execution means
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result in the specific game state and the first special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the variation display,
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result in the specific game state and the second special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the second special game. It is characterized by this.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game that is executed when the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, the game ball enters the first variable entrance. In the second special game that is executed when the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second variable entrance, and In the specific game state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entry port associated with the second special game is higher than in game states other than the specific game state. As a result, the second variable input associated with the second special game can be executed in a situation where the variable display of the identification information that can trigger the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) can be executed. It is possible to attract the player's interest in entering the game ball into the ball opening and executing the character effect, thereby enhancing the game interest in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of reference invention 11-5 is the gaming machine of reference invention 11-3 or reference invention 11-4 described above.
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a jackpot game, and the second special game is a jackpot game. Thereby, it becomes possible to enhance the gaming interest of the gaming machine having the big hit game and the small hit game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 11-3 to Reference Invention 11-5 described above.
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result,
The probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result is higher than the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result (execution probability of the first special game), a predetermined probability, a high probability higher than the predetermined probability, The probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result (the execution probability of the second special game) is higher than the high probability. For this reason, possibility that a 2nd special game will be performed becomes high, and the possibility that the character effect accompanying a 2nd special game will also become high in connection with this. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the case where the second special game is performed.

The gaming machine of reference invention 11-7 is the gaming machine of reference invention 11-6 described above.
In the specific gaming state, the probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is set to the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific gaming state, since the probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is high, the possibility of executing the character effect accompanying the second special game is possible. It is possible to attract the player's interest in the execution of the character effect accompanying the change display of the identification information under a high situation. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-8 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 11-1 to Reference Invention 11-7 described above,
As a character displayed on the predetermined display unit, a first character and a second character are included,
As said character production, it has the 1st character production and the 2nd character production,
The first character effect is an effect including a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a second effect by the first character and the second character after the first effect,
The second character effect is an effect by the first character and the second character and does not include the second effect,
The production execution means
When performing a character effect with a variation display of the identification information, execute the first character effect,
When the character effect is executed in conjunction with the special game, the second character effect is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first character and the second character are displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the first character and the second character is executed. The character effects include a first character effect and a second character effect. The first character effect is a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a first character and a second character after the first effect. The second character effect is an effect by the first character and the second character, but does not include the second effect. Then, the first character effect is executed when the character effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the second character effect is executed when the character effect is executed along with the special game. As a result, it is possible to execute the character effect in a manner suitable for the game situation, and to attract the player's interest in the character effect.

  According to the reference invention 11 described above, it is possible to give a characteristic to the execution mode of the character effect and to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine provided with the character effect.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine, 7b Production design display area (production design display part), 8 production design, 20 1st start opening, 21 2nd start opening, 30 1st big prize opening, 35 2nd big prize opening, 39 specific area 41a First special symbol display (first special symbol display unit), 41b Second special symbol display (second special symbol display unit), 80 Main control board (main control unit), 90 Sub control board (sub control) Part), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a third effect hold indicator, 103b fourth effect hold indicator.

Claims (1)

A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first start opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first gaming state in which a game ball enters the second starting port at a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which a gaming ball enters the second starting port at a higher frequency than the first gaming state. , A game state setting means capable of setting,
A special game that executes a jackpot game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter when the variation display result of the first identification information or the second identification information is a big hit. Execution means;
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a big hit ;
A first condition state in which the time for the variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a first condition; a second condition state in which the time for the variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a second condition; A second identification information variation time determination means capable of setting
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in parallel,
The second condition state is shorter than the first condition state, and the average time of the variable display time of the second identification information determined is shorter.
As the gaming state, the predetermined probability and the first gaming state and the first condition state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability, the first gaming state and the first state Two condition states, the high probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state,
The jackpot has at least a first specific result and a second specific result,
When the first specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state. In the gaming state, the first identification information and the first 2 When the number of times of variable display with the identification information becomes a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability, the first gaming state, and the second condition state,
When the second specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state. In the gaming state, the first identification information and the first 2 When the number of times of variable display with the identification information becomes the specific number, the gaming state changes to the predetermined probability, the first gaming state, and the first condition state,
When the gaming state after the special game is set to the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state as the first specific result, and the special game as the second specific result When the game state after the end is set to the predetermined probability, the second game state, and the second condition state, the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state. In addition, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the state is the second condition state, the high probability, the second game state, or the second condition state.

Images